JP2020151397A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of increasing a degree of attention to a game.SOLUTION: When a result of a winning/losing lottery becomes a jackpot result, an opening/closing execution mode is executed. In the opening/closing execution mode, a round game for executing switching control for changing a variable winning device 32 from a closed state to an open state and then to a closed state is executed for plural times. The respective round games are configured so as to be completed when the number of winning times of game balls to the variable winning device 32 becomes the upper-limit number of winning times. A mode of the opening/closing execution mode includes a mode that includes a first round game in which the upper-limit number of winning times is set to a first number, and a second round game in which the upper-limit number of winning times is set to a second number in one opening/closing execution mode.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 4

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine.

For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, a lottery process is executed based on a predetermined lottery opportunity, and when the lottery result is a specific result, the game shifts to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. There is a known one (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2004-81853

Here, there is still room for improvement in the game machine in order to raise the degree of attention to the game.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of increasing the degree of attention to the game.

The present invention
A transition determination means that executes a predetermined transition determination based on a predetermined determination opportunity,
When the result of the predetermined transition determination is a predetermined transition correspondence result, a special game state transition means for shifting the gaming state to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, and
A variable ball entry means that can switch between a first state in which a game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and a second state in which a game ball cannot enter or is more difficult to enter than the first state.
A switching control means for executing switching control for changing the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state and then changing to the second state.
With
The special gaming state is configured to be able to execute a round game in which the switching control is executed at least once a plurality of times.
When a specific number of game balls enter the variable ball entry means during the execution of the round game, the round game end means for ending the round game being executed is provided.
In the aspect of the special gaming state, a first round game in which the specific number is the first number and a second round game in which the specific number is a second number different from the first number are set to 1. It is characterized in that the aspect included in the special gaming state is included.

According to the present invention, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

It is a front view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the main structure of a pachinko machine in development. It is a perspective view which shows the main structure of a pachinko machine in development. (A) is a front view showing a game board unit, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of a general electric accessory. It is a front view of the guide passage part. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device in the closed state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device in the open state. (A) is a front view of the variable winning device with the opening / closing door omitted, and (b) is a perspective view of the variable winning device in the open state. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the display content on the display screen of a symbol display device. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the display content on the display screen of a symbol display device. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of various counters used for a winning / failing lottery. It is explanatory drawing of the jackpot type table. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows a normal process. It is a flowchart which shows the game time control process. (A) is a flowchart showing a fluctuation start process, and (b) is an explanatory diagram of a stop result table for a jackpot. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transition process. It is a flowchart which shows the opening and closing process of a big winning opening. It is a flowchart which shows the V prize processing. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for each round. It is explanatory drawing of the upper limit number distribution table. It is a flowchart which shows the transition process at the end of an opening / closing execution mode. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of the game in the opening / closing execution mode. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of the game in the opening / closing execution mode. It is a flowchart which shows the effect processing for opening / closing execution mode executed by the MPU of the effect control device which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a waiting period. It is a flowchart which shows the process for starting a round. It is a flowchart which shows the process for during a round. It is a flowchart which shows the process for ending a round. It is the schematic which shows the display example of the display screen. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of the game production in an opening / closing execution mode. It is a figure which shows the passage structure of the variable winning apparatus which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process for falling prize. It is a flowchart which shows a normal process. It is a flowchart which shows the opening and closing process of a big winning opening. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for each round. (A) is an explanatory diagram of the upper limit number distribution table, and (b) is an explanatory diagram of an opening / closing pattern table. It is a flowchart which shows the process for opening. It is a flowchart which shows the process for round update or the ending start. (A) is a flowchart showing a shutter driving process, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining an operation mode of the shutter. (A) is a flowchart showing a transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode, and (b) is an explanatory diagram of a jackpot type table. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of the game in the opening / closing execution mode. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of the game in the opening / closing execution mode. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of the game in the opening / closing execution mode. It is a figure which shows the passage structure of the variable winning apparatus which concerns on 4th Embodiment. It is a front view of the variable winning device in the closed state. (A) is an explanatory diagram of a jackpot type table, (b) is an explanatory diagram of a shutter distribution table, and (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining an operation mode of the shutter. It is a flowchart which shows a normal process. It is a flowchart which shows the V distribution processing. It is a flowchart which shows the opening and closing process of a big winning opening. It is explanatory drawing of the upper limit number distribution table. It is a flowchart which shows the V prize processing. It is a flowchart which shows the transition process at the end of an opening / closing execution mode. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of the game in the opening / closing execution mode. It is the schematic which shows the display example of the display screen in the opening / closing execution mode. It is the schematic which shows the display example of the display screen in the opening / closing execution mode. (A) is a diagram showing another example of the passage structure, and (b) is a sectional view taken along line BB of (a). It is a figure which shows another example of a passage structure.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, referred to as “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views showing the main configurations of the pachinko machine 10. In FIG. 2, for convenience, the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the game area is omitted.

The pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 that forms the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a game machine main body 12 that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 in the forward direction. The game machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13.

As shown in FIG. 2, the inner frame 13 of the game machine main body 12 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 with one of the left and right side portions as the support side. Further, the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported with one of the left and right side portions as the support side. Further, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported with one of the left and right side portions as the support side.

The game machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device 16 at the rotating tip portion thereof, and has a function of locking the game machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 so as not to be openable. It has a function of locking the front door frame 14 so that it cannot be opened with respect to the inner frame. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

The front door frame 14 provided so as to cover the entire front surface side of the inner frame 13 is formed with a window portion 61 so that almost the entire area of the game area, which will be described later, can be visually recognized from the front. The window portion 61 has a substantially elliptical shape, and the window panel 62 is fitted therein. The window panel 62 is formed colorless and transparent by glass, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the window panel 62 may be formed colorless and transparent by a synthetic resin.

Light emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the window 61. A light emitting unit 63 is provided above the window unit 61 as a part of the various lamp units. Further, on both the left and right sides of the light emitting unit 63, speaker units 64 for outputting sound effects and the like according to the game situation are provided.

Below the window portion 61 in the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 65 and a lower bulging portion 66 bulging toward the front side are arranged vertically. An upper plate 71 that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulge portion 65, and a lower plate 72 that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulge portion 66. The upper plate 71 has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device 96 provided in the back pack unit 15 and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism 53 side while arranging them in a row. Further, the lower plate 72 has a function of storing the surplus game balls in the upper plate 71.

A firing handle 60 is provided on the right side of the lower plate 72 in the front door frame 14. By operating the launch handle 60, the game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism 53 provided below the game area PE in the inner frame 13 toward the game area PE. In this case, by changing the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 60, the firing intensity of the game ball launched toward the gaming area PE, that is, the firing momentum is changed. In the pachinko machine 10, when the launch handle 60 is operated by the player, the game ball launch mechanism 53 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area PE every 0.6 sec. To.

The game area PE is formed in the game board unit 24 mounted on the inner frame 13. Hereinafter, the game board unit 24 (particularly, various configurations arranged in the game area PE of the game board 24a) will be described. FIG. 4A is a front view of the game board unit 24.

The game board unit 24 includes, for example, a game board 24a formed mainly of a plate material made of a transparent synthetic resin material. An opaque game area partition member (spacer) 301 is attached to the peripheral edge of the game board 24a so as to project forward from the surface of the plate material to the front of the game machine. The game area partition member 301 has a frame shape having a substantially elliptical opening inside, and the surface of the game board 24a (plate material) can be visually recognized from the front of the game machine through the opening. Further, an outer rail portion 52 is attached to the surface of the plate material along the opening of the game area partition member 301, and further inside the outer rail portion 52, the inside extends to the left side portion and the lower portion of the game board 24a. The rail portion 51 is attached.

The game area partition member 301, the inner rail portion 51, and the outer rail portion 52 face the front door frame 14 or the window panel 62, and the protrusion amount is set so that the gap between them is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Has been done. As a result, it is prevented that the game ball gets over the game area partition member 301, the inner rail portion 51, and the outer rail portion 52 and jumps out of the game board 24a. That is, the game area PE is divided by the game area partition member 301, the inner rail portion 51, and the outer rail portion 52. Further, the inner rail portion 51 and the outer rail portion 52 form a guide rail 54 for the game ball to the game area PE, and the game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 53 by the player rotating the launch handle 60. Is guided to the upper part of the game area PE by the guide rail 54.

The guide rail 54 is formed so that its outlet portion faces the upper center of the game area PE on one side of the game area PE. Therefore, as the amount of rotation of the firing handle 60 by the player increases, the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area PE is from the side of the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 54 is formed to the opposite side. It shifts to the side of the side. The outlet portion of the guide rail 54 is provided on the left side portion of the game area PE.

In the range defined as the game area PE in the game board 24a, a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed by performing router processing. Each opening has a general winning opening 31, a variable winning device 32, a first operating port (or a first starting ball entry section) 33, a second operating opening (or a second starting ball entry section) 34, a through gate 35, and a variable. A display unit 36, a special drawing display unit 43, a general drawing display unit 44, and the like are provided. It should be noted that a plurality of general winning openings 31 are provided.

Even if a ball enters the through gate 35, the game ball is not paid out. On the other hand, when a ball enters the general winning opening 31, the variable winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Specifically, regarding the number of prize balls, four are paid out when a ball enters the first operating port 33, and three when an entry into the second operating port 34 occurs. Is paid out. Further, when a ball is entered into the general winning opening 31, 10 prize balls are paid out, and when a ball is entered into the variable winning device 32, 15 prize balls are paid out. Will be done.

However, the number of these prize balls is arbitrary. For example, the number of prize balls related to the first operating port 33 and the number of prize balls related to the second operating port 34 may be the same, or the number of prize balls related to the second operating port 34 may be the same. The number of prize balls according to the above may be larger than the number of prize balls related to the first operating port 33. Further, the number of prize balls related to the variable winning device 32 may be the same as or smaller than the number of prize balls related to other operating ports or the like.

An out port 37 is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 24a, and a game ball that does not enter various winning ports or the like is discharged from the game area PE through the out port 37. Even if a game ball enters the out port 37, the prize ball is not paid out. Further, on the game board 24a, a large number of nails 38 are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through the predetermined opening, and not only the mode in which the game ball is discharged from the game area PE after passing through the opening, but also from the game area PE after passing through the opening. The mode in which it is not discharged is also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish it from the entry of the game ball into the out port 37, the general winning opening 31, the variable winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35 The entry of a game ball into a game is also referred to as a prize.

The variable display unit 36 is provided so as to include the central portion of the game area PE. Due to the peripheral edge (center frame 302) of the variable display unit 36 projecting forward of the game machine from the surface of the game board 24a, the area where the game ball launched into the game area PE can flow down is divided. Has been done. Specifically, in the game region PE, the upper region PE1 which is an region above the predetermined height position of the center frame 302 and the upper region PE1 which is continuous below the upper region PE1 and to the left of the center frame 302. The left region PE2, which is the region of the above, the right region PE3, which is a region continuous below the upper region PE1 and to the right of the center frame 302, and the left region PE2 and the right region PE3, respectively. It is continuously divided below the lower region PE4, which is a region below the center frame 302.

Which region of each of these regions PE1 to PE4 the game region flows down (passes) is determined by the amount of rotation operation of the launch handle 60, that is, the launching force of the game ball. Specifically, when the player performs the rotation operation of the launch handle 60 with the rotation operation amount in the first range which is equal to or more than the predetermined rotation amount and less than the reference rotation amount, the launched game ball. However, in the upper region PE1, it is more likely to be launched to the left than the center position in the lateral direction. In this case, the game ball flows down the game area PE in the order of the upper area PE1 → the left side area PE2 → the lower area PE4.

On the other hand, when the player performs a rotation operation of the launch handle 60 with a rotation operation amount in the second range that is equal to or greater than the reference rotation amount, the launched game ball is positioned at the center position in the horizontal direction in the upper region PE1. It is easier to launch to the right than. In this case, the game ball flows down in the order of upper region PE1 → right region PE3 → lower region PE4. That is, by adjusting the rotation operation amount of the launch handle 60, whether the game ball plays on the left route flowing down the left region PE2 or the game ball plays on the right route flowing down the right region PE3. , It is possible for the player to select.

The predetermined rotation amount is the rotation operation amount that enables the launched game ball to pass through the guide rail 54 and enter the game area PE, and the reference rotation amount is the rotation operation amount that the game ball flows down the left side area PE2. It is a rotation operation amount in which the ratio of the game ball flowing down the right region PE3 and the ratio of the game ball flowing down are the same or substantially the same. In the rotation operation amount in the first range, the ratio of the game ball flowing down the left side region PE2 is high, and in the rotation operation amount in the second range, the ratio of the game ball flowing down in the right side region PE3 is high.

The first actuating port 33 is installed in the lower region PE4. The first operating port 33 is open upward and has a size that allows one game ball to win a prize. The first operating port 33 is not provided with a member for opening and closing the first operating port 33, and is always open. Then, in the situation where the game ball is launched in the same mode, the winning probability to the first operating port 33 is constant regardless of the game state. Further, the first operating port 33 is arranged directly below the stage formed in the center frame 302, and is a game ball that has flowed into the stage through the guidance passage formed in the center frame 302 from the center of the stage. The game ball discharged to the outside of the center frame 302 can easily win a prize in the first operating port 33. The first operating port 33 is provided with a winning sensor 33a for the first operating port, and the winning sensor 33a detects a game ball that has won a prize in the first operating port 33.

Here, with respect to the first operating port 33, the game ball flowing down the left route can be won (reachable), and the game ball flowing down the right route is not won (not reached). That is, the arrangement of the game parts and the nails 38 in the left side region PE2, the right side region PE3, and the lower side region PE4 is configured to allow the game ball flowing down the left side region PE2 to reach the first operating port 33. On the other hand, it is configured so as not to allow the game ball flowing down the right region PE3 to reach the first operating port 33. Therefore, when the player aims to win a prize in the first operating port 33, the game ball is fired so as to flow down the left route to play the game.

The second operating port 34 is installed in the right region PE3. The second operating port 34 is open to the front and has a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front of the game machine. The size of the second operating port 34 is such that a plurality of game balls can win a prize at the same time. The second operating port 34 is provided with a general electric accessory 303 for opening and closing the second operating port 34. As shown in FIG. 4B, the general electric accessory 303 has a plate-shaped opening / closing door 303a capable of covering the second operating port 34 from the front of the game machine, and a general electric use door 303a connected to the opening / closing door 303a. The drive unit 303b of the above is provided. The opening / closing door 303a is configured to be switchable between a closed position that covers the second operating port 34 from the front of the game machine and an open position that rotates forward from the closed position to open the second operating port 34. .. In the closed state (non-supported state or non-guided state) in which the opening / closing door 303a is arranged in the closed position, the game ball cannot win the second operating port 34, and the opening / closing door 303a is arranged in the open position (support). It is possible to win a prize in the second operating port 34 by being in the state or the guide state. The second operating port 34 is provided with a winning sensor 34a for the second operating port at a place where the game ball that has won the prize in the second operating port 34 always passes, and the winning sensor 34a causes the second operating port 34 to reach the second operating port 34. The winning game ball is detected.

The closed state of the opening / closing door 303a is not limited to the one in which the second operating port 34 cannot be won, and the second operating port 34 can be won in a range in which the second operating port 34 is less likely to be won than in the open state. It may be a thing. That is, the state switching of the opening / closing door 303a is a state in which a game ball is likely to be won in the second operating port 34, and a state in which winning is more difficult to occur than in a state in which winning is not impossible but the above winning is likely to occur. It may be configured to switch to.

As shown in FIG. 4A, a through gate 35 is provided above (upstream side) the second operating port 34 in the right region PE3. The through gate 35 has a through hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction, and the game ball winning the through gate 35 flows down the game area PE after winning the prize. As a result, the game ball that has won the through gate 35 can win the second operating port 34 and the variable winning device 32. The through gate 35 is provided with a detection sensor 35a, and the detection sensor 35a detects a game ball that has won a prize in the through gate 35.

Based on the winning of the through gate 35, the utility accessory 303 of the second operating port 34 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, an internal lottery is performed triggered by winning a prize in the through gate 35, the result of the internal lottery is an opening result (support winning), a stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the variable display is terminated. In that case, the character opening / closing game (support execution mode) is executed. In the accessory opening / closing game, the general electric accessory 303 is opened in a predetermined mode.

A variable winning device 32 is arranged below (downstream side) the second operating port 34 in the right region PE3. The variable winning device 32 is for a large winning opening 32a leading to the back side of the game board 24a, an opening / closing door 304 (see FIG. 5) for opening / closing the large winning opening 32a, and a variable winning device for driving the opening / closing door 304. It is equipped with a drive unit 305 (see FIG. 6). The opening / closing door 304 is configured to be switchable between a closed position that covers the large winning opening 32a from the front of the game machine and an open position that rotates forward from the closed position to open the large winning opening 32a. In the closed state where the opening / closing door 304 is arranged in the closed position, the game ball cannot win the large winning opening 32a, and the opening / closing door 304 is arranged in the open position, so that the large winning opening 32a is won. It will be possible.

It should be noted that the closed state of the opening / closing door 304 is not limited to the one that prohibits the winning of the large winning opening 32a, and the winning is possible within the range in which the winning of the large winning opening 32a is less likely to occur compared to the open state. There may be. That is, the state of the opening / closing door 304 is switched between a state in which a game ball is likely to be won in the large winning opening 32a and a state in which winning is more difficult to occur than in a state in which winning is not impossible but the above winning is likely to occur. The configuration may be switched.

The opening / closing door 304 is normally in a closed state in which the game ball cannot win or is difficult to win, and the game ball can win or win when the transition to the opening / closing execution mode (opening / closing execution state) is won in the internal lottery. It can be switched to an easy open state. Here, the open / close execution mode is a mode that shifts when a big hit is won. As an opening mode of the variable winning device 32, there is a mode in which the variable winning device 32 is repeatedly opened up to a plurality of rounds, with a predetermined time elapse or a predetermined number of winnings as one round.

With respect to the second operating port 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 32, winning is not possible when the firing handle 60 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left area PE2, and the right area PE3 If the firing handle 60 is operated so that the game ball flows down, a prize can be won. Therefore, when the player aims to win a prize in the second operating port 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 32, the game ball is launched so as to flow down the right route to play the game.

The right route is provided with a guide passage portion 401 that guides a game ball flowing down the right region PE3 to a through gate 35, a second operating port 34, and a variable winning device 32. The details of the guide passage portion 401 will be described later. Further, a return rubber 306 (FIG. 5) is arranged at a position where the game ball flying along the guide rail 54 collides with the upstream portion of the right route. The return rubber 306 is a cushioning member, and the game ball that collides with the return rubber 306 flows down the right route after its momentum is weakened.

The special drawing display unit 43 and the general drawing display unit 44 are provided on the decorative member 39 arranged along the outer edge on the lower side of the game area PE. The decorative member 39 extends forward from the surface of the game board 24a to the front of the game machine. Specifically, the front surface of the decorative member 39 faces the window panel 62 provided on the front door frame 14 in order to make the game area PE visible from the front of the game machine, and further between the window panel 62 and the window panel 62. The distance is narrower than one game ball. As a result, the game ball is prevented from falling in front of the front surface of the decorative member 39.

In order to clearly indicate the number of round games in the opening / closing execution mode when the opening / closing execution mode is set (or the opening / closing execution mode is set) by winning a big hit in the internal lottery on the special figure display unit 43. The round display unit RS is provided. The round display unit RS starts displaying the number of round games when the open / close execution mode starts, and ends the display when the open / close execution mode ends.

Further, the special figure display unit 43 has a first special figure display unit AS for clearly indicating the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. A second special figure display unit BS for clearly indicating the result of the internal lottery conducted based on the winning is set.

In the first special figure display unit AS, the variation display of the pattern is performed with the winning of the first operating port 33 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variation display, it is performed based on the winning of the first operating port 33. The result of the internal lottery is clearly indicated by the display. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 33 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the predetermined stop result is displayed on the first special figure display unit AS. After the fluctuation display is stopped, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode.

In the second special figure display unit BS, the variation display of the pattern is performed by triggering the winning of the second operating port 34, and as a result of stopping the variation display, the variation display is performed based on the winning of the second operating port 34. The result of the internal lottery is clearly indicated by the display. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 34 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the predetermined stop result is displayed on the second special figure display unit BS. After the fluctuation display is stopped, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode.

Here, based on the winning of any of the operating ports 33 and 34, the variable display is started on the corresponding first special figure display unit AS and the second special figure display unit BS, and the predetermined stop result is stopped and displayed. The period until the stop display ends corresponds to one game.

The general drawing display unit 44 is a display unit for clearly indicating the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 35. In this case, the display unit 44 for the general drawing performs a variable display of the pattern triggered by winning a prize in the through gate 35, and as a result of stopping the variable display, an internal lottery is performed based on the winning in the through gate 35. The result of is specified by the display. Even in the variable display of the pattern based on the winning of the through gate 35, the variable display of the pattern is started based on the winning / failing lottery, and then the variable display is confirmed in the manner corresponding to the result of the winning / failing lottery. Displaying is one of the game times.

If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the through gate 35 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the support state for opening the general electric accessory 303, the predetermined stop result is displayed on the general drawing display unit 44. Is displayed and the variable display is stopped, and then the game shifts to the character opening / closing game. In the accessory opening / closing game, the opening / closing control (switching control) in which the universal accessory 303 is changed from the closed state to the open state and then closed is executed at least once. In the accessory opening / closing game, when the total opening period reaches a predetermined period (for example, 6 sec) after shifting to the game, or when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are won in the second operating port 34. It is configured to end in.

The special drawing display unit 43 and the general drawing display unit 44 are composed of a segment display device having a plurality of segments, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other display devices such as a liquid crystal display device can be used. May be good.

Next, the variable display unit 36 will be described. The variable display unit 36 is provided with a symbol display device 41 for variable display (or variable display or switching display) of a symbol which is a kind of symbol.

The symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

On the symbol display device 41, for example, symbols are displayed side by side in the upper, middle, and lower directions, and these symbols are variably displayed so as to be scrolled in the left-right direction. In this case, the variation display in the symbol display device 41 is started based on the winning of the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. That is, when the special figure display unit 43 performs the variable display, the symbol display device 41 also performs the variable display accordingly. Then, when the game shifts to the big hit game state in which the big winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 is opened, the symbol display device 41 stops and displays a predetermined combination of symbols on the preset effective line.

Further, the symbol display device 41 is subjected to hold display corresponding to the first special figure display unit AS and the second special figure display unit BS. The number of game balls winning in the first operating port 33 is reserved up to four, and the number of winning games in the second operating port 34 is held up to four. In the above-mentioned hold display, a predetermined hold image is displayed, and the number of holds for each of the operating ports 33 and 34 is indicated by the number of the displayed images. The number of holdings is not limited to that shown by the holding image, and may be shown by numerical display. Further, the configuration is not limited to the symbol display device 41, and may be indicated by, for example, a display unit or a light emitting unit (holding lamp unit) provided on the game board 24a.

Next, the configuration on the back side of the game machine main body 12 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 3, a main control device 81 and an effect control device 82 are mounted on the back surface of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24a).

The main control device 81 includes a main control board having a function of controlling the main control of the game (main control circuit) and a function of monitoring the power supply (power failure monitoring circuit), and the main control board is made of a transparent resin material. It is configured to be housed in a substrate box 83 made of the above. The substrate box 83 includes a box base (front case body) having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape and a box cover (back case body) that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are inseparably connected by a box coupling portion 85 as a separation preventing means (or a coupling means), whereby the substrate box 83 is sealed. Since they are inseparably connected by the box coupling portions 85, the substrate box 83 needs to be destroyed or partially cut when the internal space of the substrate box 83 is opened. A plurality of box coupling portions 85 are provided on the long side portions of the substrate box 83, and at least one of them is used to perform the coupling treatment.

Any configuration can be applied to the box connecting portion 85 as long as the box base and the box cover cannot be opened, but by inserting a locking claw into the elongated hole constituting the box connecting portion 85, the box base and the box cover can be connected. It is designed so that it cannot be opened with the box cover. The joining process by the box joining portion 85 prevents unauthorized opening after the joining, and makes it possible to detect such a situation early and easily even if the illegal opening is performed. Even after opening, it is possible to perform the opening process again. That is, the coupling process is performed by inserting the locking claw into at least one elongated hole among the plurality of box coupling portions 85. Then, when the board box 83 is opened when a defect occurs in the housed main control board or when the main control board is inspected, the box joint 85 into which the locking claw is inserted and the other box joint 85 Cut the connecting part of the box and the connecting part with the box body. As a result, the box base of the board box 83 and the box cover are separated, and the main control board inside can be taken out. After that, when the coupling process is performed again, the locking claw is inserted into the elongated hole of the other box coupling portion 85. If the history of the opening of the board box 83 is left in the board box 83, it is possible to easily discover that the board box 83 has been opened illegally by looking at the board box 83.

A plurality of coupling pieces 86 are provided on one short side of the substrate box 83 so as to project to the side thereof. These coupling pieces 86 have a one-to-one correspondence with a plurality of coupled pieces 87 formed on the mounting base of the main control device 81, and the coupling pieces 86 and the coupling pieces 87 form a substrate box 83 and a mounting base. The join process is performed between.

As a trace means for detecting unauthorized opening of the substrate box 83, a sealing sticker may be attached so as to straddle the boundary between the box base and the box cover. In this case, when the sealing sticker is peeled off from the sticking portion, the adhesive layer of the sealing sticker remains on the substrate box 83 side, and a trace thereof remains. Further, the seal seal is provided with an IC tag that transmits a response wave containing identification information to a ringing wave of a predetermined frequency, and when the seal seal is removed, the antenna of the IC tag is cut off and the response is described above. It may be configured so that the transmission of waves is impossible.

The effect control device 82 includes an effect control board that controls voice and lamp display and a display control device (not shown) according to an instruction from the main control device 81, and the effect control board is a substrate box made of a transparent resin material or the like. It is housed in 84 and is configured.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 91, and a payout mechanism unit 92, a discharge passage board 88, and a control device collecting unit 93 are attached to the back pack 91. The back pack 91 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and has a protective cover portion 94 that protrudes rearward and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape so as to cover the main control device 81, the effect control device 82, and the like from the rear. ing.

The payout mechanism unit 92 is arranged so as to bypass the protective cover unit 94, and is a tank 95 in which game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a game stored in the tank 95. It is equipped with a payout device 96 for paying out balls. The game ball paid out from the payout device 96 is discharged to the upper plate 71 or the lower plate 72 through a payout passage (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the payout device 96. Further, the payout mechanism unit 92 is equipped with a back pack board provided with a power switch for turning on and off the power supply while supplying, for example, an AC 24 volt main power supply.

Further, the back pack 91 is provided with an external output terminal 99 on the rotation shaft side of the back pack unit 15 and on the upper edge side. The external output terminal 99 is provided with an output terminal for outputting a signal when the game balls are insufficient in the tank 95 or the like, an output terminal for outputting a signal each time a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out, and a predetermined number of game balls. An output terminal for outputting a signal each time it is rented, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the game machine main body 12 is opened, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the front door frame 14 is opened, and a state transition such as an opening / closing execution mode. An output terminal for signal output is provided (or during the transition to the state). Then, through these output terminals, a signal regarding the state of the frame side is output to the management control device on the game hall side. It should be noted that an output terminal for outputting a signal each time a predetermined number of game balls are rented is not required in a so-called cash machine.

The discharge passage board 88 is formed with a discharge passage that is open to the rear on a surface facing the control device assembly unit 93, and the open portion of the discharge passage is closed by the control device assembly unit 93. The game balls that have won the various winning openings 31, 33, 34, 321 and 351 and the game balls that have entered the out opening 37 are led out to the discharge passage on the back side of the game board 24a. The discharge passage is formed so as to discharge the game ball to the island facility or the like of the game hall, and the game ball led out to the discharge passage is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 by passing through the discharge passage.

The control device collective unit 93 has a horizontally long mounting base, on which the payout control device 97, the power supply, and the launch control device 98 are mounted. The payout control device 97 and the power supply and launch control device 98 are arranged so as to be stacked in the front-rear direction so that the payout control device 97 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

The payout control device 97 is configured such that a payout control board for controlling the payout device 96 is housed in a board box. In this case, the same fraud suppression means as the board box 83 of the main control device 81 may be applied to the board box of the payout control device 97.

The power supply and launch control device 98 is configured by accommodating a power supply and a launch control board in a board box, and the board generates and outputs predetermined electric power required by various control devices and the like, and is further produced by a player. The launch of the game ball is controlled according to the operation of the launch handle 60. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has a storage and retention function for various data, and can maintain the state at the time of a power failure even in the unlikely event of a power failure, and can return to the state at the time of a power failure when recovering from the power failure. It has become like.

<Guide passage section 401>
Here, the configuration relating to the guide passage portion 401 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a front view of the guide passage portion 401.

In the right route, the outer wall portion 302a of the center frame 302, the inner side surface portion 52a of the outer rail portion 52, and the inner side surface portion 301a of the game area partition member 301 divide the passage area in which the game ball can flow down. A passage wall portion 402 extending toward the variable winning device 32 is provided at a position in the middle of the region. The passage wall portion 402 projects forward from the surface of the game board 24a (plate material) to the front of the game machine, whereby the outer passage portion 403 on the right side of the passage wall portion 402 and the inner passage portion 404 on the left side of the passage wall portion 402 are formed. Is formed. The passage widths of the outer passage portion 403 and the inner passage portion 404 are larger than the diameter of the game ball and smaller than twice the diameter dimension of the game ball, and each of them has one ball passage.

The amount of protrusion of the passage wall portion 402 is set so that the gap between the passage wall portion 402 and the window panel 62 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball, and the game ball straddles the passage wall portion 402 to form the outer passage portion 403 and the inner passage portion. It is prevented from moving between and the 404. Further, although not shown, a plurality of protrusions are provided on the side surface portion of the passage wall portion 402, the right outer wall portion 302b of the center frame 302, and the inner wall portion 301b of the game area partition member 301, and the outer passage portion 403 is provided. And a deceleration means for reducing the speed of the game ball flowing down the inner passage portion 404 is provided.

The passage wall portion 402 is set so that its upstream tip portion 402c is at substantially the same height position as the return rubber 306, and is configured to extend downward from the height position toward the variable winning device 32. There is. Here, where the rate of fire (rate of fire) of the game ball can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the launch handle 60, the game ball returns the rubber ball 306 while passing through the gap between the upper portion of the center frame 302 and the outer rail portion 52. When the game ball is launched at a speed (rate of fire) that does not reach the center frame 302, the game ball flows into the right route (right region PE3) through the gap, and then the right outer wall portion 302b of the center frame 302. It rests on and moves along the right outer wall portion 302b. As a result, the game ball flows into the inlet portion 404a of the inner passage portion 404 and flows down the inner passage portion 404. On the other hand, when the game ball is launched at a speed at which the game ball reaches the return rubber 306, the game ball collides with the return rubber 306 and is energized, and then falls downward to the outer passage portion. It flows into the inlet portion 403a of the 403 and flows down the outer passage portion 403. That is, by adjusting the rate of fire of the game ball, the player can distinguish between passing the game ball through the inner passage portion 404 and passing the game ball through the outer passage portion 403.

The height position of the upstream end portion 402c of the passage wall portion 402 does not necessarily have to be substantially the same as the height position of the return rubber 306. That is, since it is sufficient if the inner passage portion 404 and the outer passage portion 403 can be separated from each other, when the game ball is launched with a strength that reaches the return rubber 306, the game ball and the passage wall portion 402 (upstream). Set to an arbitrary height position as long as it can avoid a collision with the side tip portion 402c) and can guide the game ball that collides with the return rubber 306 and falls to the outer passage portion 403. can do.

A through gate 35 is arranged in the middle of the outer passage portion 403, and by firing the game ball so that the game ball flows down the outer passage portion 403, the through gate 35 can pass the game ball. It has become. Further, a second operating port 34 is arranged below the through gate 35. The second operating port 34 is arranged so as to straddle the inner passage portion 404 and the outer passage portion 403, and it is possible to make the second operating port 34 win a game ball from any of the passage portions 403 and 404. It has become.

A variable winning device 32 is arranged below the second operating port 34. The variable winning device 32 (large winning opening 32a) is arranged so as to straddle the inner passage portion 404 and the outer passage portion 403.
The game ball flowing down the outer passage portion 403 is guided to the right side region of the variable winning device 32, and the game ball flowing down the inner passage portion 404 is guided to the left side region of the variable winning device 32.

The opening / closing doors 303a and 304 of the general electric accessory 303 and the variable winning device 32 are attached so as to be parallel to the front portion of the game board 24a (more specifically, substantially flush with each other) when arranged in the closed position. In the situation where the general electric accessory 303 and the variable winning device 32 are closed, the game ball can pass in front of the opening / closing doors 303a and 304.

Further, in order to avoid interference between the opening / closing door 303a of the general electric accessory 303 provided in the second operating port 34 and the passage wall portion 402, the passage wall portion 402 is not provided in front of the opening / closing door 303a. It has become. That is, the passage wall portion 402 includes an upper side wall portion 402a extending from the upstream tip portion 402c to the vicinity of the upper end of the second operating port 34, and a lower side wall extending from the vicinity of the lower end of the second operating port 34 to the vicinity of the upper end of the variable winning device 32. It is composed of a part 402b.

<Variable winning device 32>
Next, the configuration related to the variable winning device 32 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 7. FIG. 6A is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 32 in the closed state, FIG. 6B is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 32 in the open state, and FIG. 7A is the opening / closing door 304. The front view of the variable winning device 32 in the omitted state, (b) is a perspective view of the variable winning device 32 in the open state. 6 (a) and 6 (b) are cross-sectional views corresponding to the cross-sectional views taken along the line AA of FIG. 7 (a).

As shown in FIG. 5, an opening 75 that penetrates the game board 24a in the thickness direction is formed at a position on the game board 24a where the variable winning device 32 is arranged. The variable winning device 32 includes a plate-shaped base body 501, and the variable winning device 32 is attached to the game board 24a by fitting the base body into the opening 75 from the front of the game machine.

The base body 501 is formed so as to be parallel to the front surface of the game board 24a, and the game ball can pass in front of the base body 501. An opening that opens forward is formed in the central portion of the base body 501, and a large winning opening 32a is formed by the opening.

As described above, the variable winning device 32 is provided with an opening / closing door 304 for opening / closing the large winning opening 32a and a drive unit 305 for opening / closing the opening / closing door 304. The drive unit 305 has a solenoid as a drive source and a link mechanism as a drive force transmitting means for transmitting the drive force of the solenoid to the opening / closing door 304. The solenoid is electrically connected to the main control device 81 and is driven based on a drive signal from the main control device 81. When the solenoid is driven, the opening / closing door 304 is rotated forward and displaced to the open position, and the variable winning device 32 is switched from the closed state to the open state. When the output of the drive signal from the main control device 81 is stopped, the opening / closing door 304 returns from the open position to the closed position by the urging force of the urging means (spring or the like), and the variable winning device 32 is switched from the open state to the closed state. It changes.

As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, a passage portion 502 for guiding the game ball winning in the large winning opening 32a to the rear of the game board 24a is provided on the back side of the base body 501. The passage portion 502 has a horizontally long shape when viewed from the front of the game machine, and on the left and right sides of the back wall portion 503 of the passage portion 502, the right entrance for guiding the game ball in the passage portion 502 to the rear. A portion 504 and a left entrance portion 505 are provided. Each of the entrance portions 504 and 505 penetrates the back wall portion 503 in the thickness direction, and each has a size that allows one game ball to pass through.

As shown in FIG. 6B, a right vertical passage portion 506 extending in the vertical direction is provided behind the right entrance portion 504. The right vertical passage portion 506 communicates with the passage portion 502, and guides the game ball that has entered the right entrance portion 504 among the game balls that have flowed into the large winning opening 32a (passage portion 502) downward. The game ball guided by the right vertical passage portion 506 is led out to the discharge passage board 88 (see FIG. 3) and discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. A V winning sensor 507 that detects a game ball that has entered the right entrance portion 504 is arranged at an intermediate position of the right vertical passage portion 506. The V winning sensor 507 is electrically connected to the main control device 81, and when the game ball passes through the detection area of the V winning sensor 507, predetermined detection information (detection signal) is input to the main control device 81. To. Based on this detection information, the main control device 81 determines whether or not the game ball has passed the V winning sensor 507.

As described above, when the game state shifts to the open / close execution mode, a plurality of round games are executed, but in the present embodiment, the game ball passes through the V winning sensor 507 during the execution of one round game. On condition that (the occurrence of V prize), the next round game is executed. Therefore, if the game ball does not pass through the V winning sensor 507 during the round game, the open / close execution mode ends even before the final round game ends. Here, in the round game, the variable winning control for changing the variable winning device 32 from the closed state to the open state and then changing to the closed state is executed at least once. In the present embodiment, the variable winning control is executed once for one round game.

In addition to the role of detecting the occurrence of the V prize, the V prize sensor 507 also plays a role of detecting whether or not the game ball has won the prize in the large prize opening 32a. Therefore, when the detection information indicating that the game ball has passed through the sensor 507 is output from the V winning sensor 507, the main control device 81 indicates that the game ball has won the large winning opening 32a and that the V winning has occurred. To grasp each.

Further, a translucent portion is provided in front of the V winning sensor 507, so that the V winning sensor 507 can be visually recognized from the front of the game machine. As a result, the player can visually check whether or not the game ball has passed the V winning sensor 507, and it is suppressed that the presence or absence of the V winning is not known in the open / close execution mode (round game). ..

As shown in FIG. 7A, a left vertical passage portion 508 extending in the vertical direction is provided behind the left entrance portion 505. The left vertical passage portion 508 communicates with the passage portion 502, and guides the game ball that has entered the left entrance portion 505 among the game balls that have flowed into the large winning opening 32a (passage portion 502) downward. The game ball guided by the left vertical passage portion 508 is led out to the discharge passage board 88 and discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. A winning sensor 509 that detects a game ball that has entered the left entrance portion 505 is arranged at an intermediate position of the left vertical passage portion 508. The winning sensor 509 is electrically connected to the main control device 81, and when the game ball passes through the detection area of the winning sensor 509, predetermined detection information (detection signal) is input to the main control device 81. Based on this detection information, the main control device 81 determines whether or not the game ball has passed the winning sensor 509.

Note that the winning sensor 509, unlike the V winning sensor 507, detects only whether or not a game ball has won a prize in the large winning opening 32a. Further, a light transmitting portion is provided in front of the winning sensor 509, so that the winning sensor 509 can be visually recognized from the front of the game machine. Since the occurrence of a prize in the large winning opening 32a can be grasped if the large winning opening 32a can be visually recognized even if the winning sensor 509 cannot be visually recognized, the translucent portion for the winning sensor 509 may be omitted.

The passage width of the right vertical passage portion 506 and the left vertical passage portion 508 is larger than the diameter of the game ball and smaller than twice the diameter dimension of the game ball, and each of these passage portions 506 and 508 is 1. It is a ball passage of the article.

As shown in FIGS. 7A and 7B, a partition 511 is provided between the right entrance portion 504 and the left entrance portion 505 in the back wall portion 503 of the passage portion 502. The partition portion 511 projects from the front surface of the back wall portion 503 to the front of the game machine, and divides the inside of the passage portion 502 into a right side space and a left side space. Further, the partition portion 511 is located directly below the passage wall portion 402 (lower side wall portion 402b) provided above the variable winning device 32, and is arranged so as to be aligned with the passage wall portion 402 in a straight line. There is. Therefore, when the variable winning device 32 is in the open state, the game ball flowing down the outer passage portion 403 of the guide passage portion 401 flows into the right entrance portion 504, passes through the V winning sensor 507, and passes through the V winning sensor 507, and the inner passage portion 404. The game ball flowing down the ball flows into the left entrance portion 505 and passes through the winning sensor 509.

Further, a protruding portion 512 is formed on the back surface portion 304a of the opening / closing door 304 (the ball receiving portion when the variable winning device 32 is in the open state) corresponding to the partition portion 511 in the large winning opening 32a. As a result, even if the game ball placed on the back surface portion 304a of the opening / closing door 304 moves laterally, it is suppressed from moving to the region on the opposite side. As a result, the game ball flowing down the passage portions 403 and 404 can be satisfactorily guided to the entrance portions 504 and 505 corresponding to the passage portions 403 and 404.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

The MPU 112 is mounted on the main control board 111. The MPU 112 is a ROM 113 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 112, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 113 is executed. A certain RAM 114, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are built in. It is not essential that the ROM 113 and the RAM 114 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 112, and each may be individually chipped. This also applies to the MPU of the control device other than the main control device 81.

The MPU 112 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A power failure monitoring board 115 and a payout control device 97 provided in the main control device 81 are connected to the input side of the MPU 112. In this case, a power supply and a launch control device 98 having a function of supplying operating power are connected to the power failure monitoring board 115, and power is supplied to the MPU 112 via the power failure monitoring board 115.

Further, various sensors are connected to the input side of the MPU 112. The various sensors include the general winning opening 31, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, the through gate 35, the general winning opening winning sensor 31a for detecting the winning of the variable winning device 32, and the first operating port winning. A sensor 33a, a winning sensor 34c for the second operating port, a winning sensor 35a for through, a V winning sensor 507, a winning sensor 509, and the like are provided. Based on the detection results of these various sensors 31a, 33a, 34a, 35a, 507, 509, the MPU 112 makes a winning determination (ball entry determination) for each ball entry portion. Further, in the MPU 112, various lottery is executed based on the winning of the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35.

A power failure monitoring board 115, a payout control device 97, an effect control device 82, and the like are connected to the output side of the MPU 112. The payout control device 97 outputs, for example, a prize ball command based on a winning determination result to the prize ball corresponding entry unit corresponding to the payout of the prize ball.

Various commands for effect are output to the effect control device 82. Details of these various commands will be described later. Incidentally, the effect control device 82 is electrically connected to the main control device 81 via a connector unit (connection unit) provided with connectors at both ends of the signal line.

Further, as various drive units, a drive unit 303b for the universal electric accessory 303 and a drive unit 305 for the variable winning device 32 are connected to the output side of the MPU 112. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 111, and the MPU 112 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits. Specifically, when the shift to the open / close execution mode (big hit game state) occurs, the drive control of the drive unit 305 is executed in the MPU 112 so that the open / close door 304 of the variable winning device 32 is driven. Further, when the open state of the utility accessory 303 is won, the drive control of the drive unit 303b is executed in the MPU 112 so that the opening / closing door 303a is opened / closed. Further, at each special figure game, the display control of the first special figure display unit AS or the second special figure display unit BS on the special figure display unit 43 is executed in the MPU 112, and the special figure display unit BS is used for the big hit game. The display control of the round display unit RS on the display unit 43 is executed. Then, when the lottery result of whether or not to open the general electric accessory 303 is clearly shown, the display control of the general drawing display unit 44 is executed in the MPU 112.

Furthermore, an external output terminal 99 is connected to the output side of the MPU 112, and through this external output terminal 99, the management control device (hall computer HC) on the game hall side is informed of the entry into various ball entry units and a big hit. Information about the lottery result such as is output. This makes it possible for the hall computer HC to grasp the state of the pachinko machine 10 and the like.

The power failure monitoring board 115 relays between the main control board 111 and the power supply and launch control device 98, and monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage output from the power supply and launch control device 98. The payout control device 97 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 96 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 81.

The power supply and launch control device 98 are connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, the operating power required for each of the main control board 111, the payout control device 97, and the like is generated, and the generated operating power is supplied. By the way, the power supply and the launch control device 98 are provided with a power supply unit for power failure such as a backup capacitor, and even when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is in the OFF state, the power supply unit for power failure is mainly used. Power for storing and holding is supplied to the RAM 114 of the control device 81.

Further, the power supply and the launch control device 98 are responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 53, and the game ball launch mechanism 53 is driven when a predetermined launch condition is satisfied. In this case, the game ball launch mechanism 53 includes a launch rail extending toward the guide rail 54 of the game board 24a, a ball feeding device for supplying the game ball stored in the upper plate 71 onto the launch rail, and a launch rail. It is provided with a solenoid, which is an electric actuator that launches the game ball supplied to the guide rail 54 toward the guide rail 54, and the game ball is supplied with a power supply and a drive signal from the launch control device 98 to the solenoid. Be fired.

The effect control device 82 drives and controls the light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 provided on the front door frame 14 based on various commands input from the main control device 81, and also controls the display control device 212. ..

The MPU 242 is mounted on the effect control board 241 provided on the effect control device 82. The MPU 242 is a ROM 243 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 242, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 243 is executed. A certain RAM 244, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are built in.

The MPU 242 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A main control device 81 is connected to the input side of the MPU 242. From the main control device 81, a hold display control command (hold display control information) such as a shift command or a hold command is received. It also receives game turn control commands (game turn control information) such as variable command, type command, and variable end command. In addition, it receives open / close execution mode commands (open / close execution mode information) such as open command, close command, opening command, and ending command.

The MPU 242 performs processing for executing various effects based on various commands received from the main control device 81. The received command is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 244 of the MPU 242. Then, processing such as analyzing the stored command is performed, and various effects are executed. The ROM 243 of the MPU 242 is provided with various table storage areas, and the RAM 244 of the MPU 242 is provided with various flag storage areas and various counter areas. When executing various effects, processing using these areas is provided. It is possible to do.

A light emitting unit 63 and a speaker unit 64 provided on the front door frame 14 are connected to the output side of the MPU 242, and a display control device 212 is connected to the output side.

The display control device 212 includes a display control board 271 on which a program ROM 273 and a work RAM 274 are combined into chips, an MPU 272, a video display processor (VDP) 255, a character ROM 276, and a video RAM 277, respectively. There is.

From the effect control device 82, the MPU 272 includes a hold display control command (hold display control information) for performing hold display control, a game turn control command (game turn control information) for performing variable display of symbols, and Receives open / close execution mode commands (open / close execution mode information) for displaying moving images in open / close execution mode. Then, the received commands are analyzed or predetermined arithmetic processing is performed based on the received commands to control the VDP 275 (specifically, generate an internal command for the VDP 275).

The program ROM 273 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 272 and fixed value data, and also stores and holds JPEG format image data for a background image.

The work RAM 274 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when executing various programs by the MPU 272. These work data, flags, etc. are stored in each area of the work RAM 274.

The VDP275 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 41. Since the VDP275 is an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance can be said to be a microcomputer chip with a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 275 adjusts the timings of the MPU 272, the video RAM 277, and the like to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the image data stored in the video RAM 277 from the character ROM 276 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41.

The character ROM 276 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as a symbol displayed on the symbol display device 41. The character ROM 276 holds bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.

It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 276 and to share the image data and the like with each character ROM 276. It is also possible to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 273 in the character ROM 276.

The video RAM 277 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the display content of the symbol display device 41 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 277.

Here, the display contents of the symbol display device 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 and 10. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing individual symbols that are variablely displayed by the symbol display device 41, and FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display screen G of the symbol display device 41.

As shown in FIGS. 9 (a) to 9 (j), a pattern which is a kind of a pattern consists of nine kinds of main patterns with numbers "1" to "9" and a shell-shaped pattern. It is composed of sub-designs. More specifically, nine types of character symbols such as an octopus are assigned numbers "1" to "9" to form a main symbol.

As shown in FIG. 10A, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of an upper row, a middle row, and a lower row are set on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41. Each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is configured by arranging a main symbol and a sub symbol in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in descending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. .. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol string Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and then between the main symbol of "9" and the main symbol of "1". The main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged in the above, and one sub symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, 10 main symbols are arranged and composed of 20 symbols. Then, on the display screen G, the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity. Further, as shown in FIG. 13 (b), on the display screen G, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It is supposed to be done.

Further, on the display screen G, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right-down line L4, and a right-up line L5 are set. Then, the variable display is stopped in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and all the symbol rows Z1 are formed in a state where a combination of symbols with the same number is formed on one of the effective lines. When the variable display of ~ Z3 is completed, the jackpot moving image is displayed as the occurrence of the jackpot result.

The mode of variable display of symbols in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, and includes the number of symbol rows, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol row, the number of symbols in each symbol row, and so on. The combination of symbols corresponding to big hits and misses can be changed as appropriate.

The first hold display area Ga is set on the left side at the lower part of the display screen G, and the second hold display area Gb is set on the right side at the lower part of the display screen G.

In the first hold display area (non-priority side hold display area) Ga, the same number of unit hold display areas Ga1 to Ga4 as the maximum number of holds when the game ball wins the first operating port 33 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction. The section is displayed so that it will be displayed. Specifically, when the game ball wins the first operating port 33, the maximum number of holdings is 4, and in correspondence with this, the first holding display area Ga includes the first unit holding display area Ga1 and the first. The 2 unit hold display area Ga2, the 3rd unit hold display area Ga3, and the 4th unit hold display area Ga4 are set.

For example, when the number of holdings is one when the game ball wins the first operating port 33, a predetermined holding image is displayed only in the first unit holding display area Ga1, and the game ball is first activated. When the number of holdings is 4 when the mouth 33 is won, a predetermined holding image is displayed in all of the 1st unit holding display area Ga1 to the 4th unit holding display area Ga4.

Further, in the second hold display area (priority side hold display area) Gb, the same number of unit hold display areas Gb1 to Gb4 as the maximum number of holds when the game ball wins the second operating port 34 are arranged in the left-right direction. The section is displayed so that it can be installed. Specifically, when the game ball wins the second operating port 34, the maximum number of holdings is 4, and in correspondence with this, the second holding display area Gb includes the first unit holding display area Gb1 and the first. The 2 unit hold display area Gb2, the 3rd unit hold display area Gb3, and the 4th unit hold display area Gb4 are set.

For example, when the number of holdings is one when the game ball wins the second operating port 34, the holding image is displayed only in the first unit holding display area Gb1, and the game ball is the second operating port 34. When the number of reserved images is 4, the reserved image is displayed in all of the 1st unit reserved display area Gb1 to the 4th unit reserved display area Gb4.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lottery with MPU 112 of main control device 81>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lottery with the MPU 112 of the main control device 81 will be described with reference to FIG.

The MPU 112 uses various counter information during the game to perform a big hit generation lottery, set the display of the special figure display unit 43, set the effect content of the symbol display device 41, set the display of the normal figure display unit 44, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11, the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the lottery for generating jackpots, the jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type, and the symbol display device 41 are displaced and fluctuate. The reach random number counter C3 used for the reach generation lottery, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and the fluctuation display time in the special figure display unit 43 and the symbol display device 41 are determined. It is decided to use the variable type counter CS. Further, the electric accessory opening counter C4 used for lottery as to whether or not to put the electric accessory 303 in the second operating port 34 into the electric service open state is used.

Each of the counters C1, C2, C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and the counter returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 114a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 114. In the lottery counter buffer 114a, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS is when a prize is generated in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 114b as the acquisition information storage means.

The holding ball storage area 114b includes a holding area RE including a holding area Ra for the first special figure display unit and a holding area Rb for the second special figure display unit, and an execution area AE. The holding areas Ra and Rb are provided with a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area, respectively, and a lottery counter is provided according to the winning history of the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. Each numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS stored in the buffer 114a is stored in any of the areas as hold information. The reserved information corresponds to special information or judgment information.

In this case, in the first area to the fourth area, when the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 is awarded a plurality of times in succession, the first area → the second area → the third area → Each numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of the fourth area. By providing each of the four areas in this way, up to four winning histories of the game balls to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 can be reserved and stored. Further, the reserved ball storage area 114b is provided with a total reserved number storage area, and the total reserved number storage area holds the winning history of the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. Information for identifying is stored.

The number that can be stored on hold is not limited to 4, and may be any other number such as 2, 3, or 5 or more, or may be a single number.

The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first area of the hold area RE when starting the variable display of the special figure display unit 43, and is executed at the start of one game. Based on various numerical information stored in the area AE, a hit / fail judgment or the like is performed.

More specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 599, reach the maximum value (that is, 599), and then return to 0. When the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 114b of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. More specifically, it is stored in the holding area Ra for the first special figure display unit of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins in the first operating port 33, and the second of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins in the second operating port 34. It is stored in the holding area Rb for the special figure display unit.

The value of the random number that wins the jackpot is stored as a hit / miss table (win / miss information group) in the hit / miss table storage area 113a as the hit / miss information group storage means in the ROM 113. As the pass / fail table, a pass / fail table for the low probability mode (low probability pass / fail information group) and a pass / fail table for the high probability mode (high probability pass / fail information group) are set. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode (low probability state) and a high probability mode (high probability state) are set as the lottery mode in the winning / losing lottery means.

Under the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to in the lottery, the value of the random numbers for winning the jackpot is, for example, two, and the probability of winning the jackpot is 1/300. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to in the lottery, the value of the random numbers for winning the jackpot is, for example, 20, and the probability of winning the jackpot is 1/30. In this way, in each winning / failing table, the value of the random number is set so that the winning / failing table for the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning the jackpot than the winning / failing table for the low probability mode. If the winning probability of the high probability mode is higher than that of the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers to be won are arbitrary.

In addition, in each lottery mode, the lottery result is out of order except for the value of the random number that is the big hit.

The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, reach the maximum value (that is, 99), and then return to 0. Here, in the present embodiment, a plurality of jackpot results are set. These plurality of jackpot results are (1) a lottery mode in the winning / failing lottery means after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and (2) a support mode in the general electric accessory 303 of the second operating port 34 after the opening / closing execution mode ends. It is set by providing a difference in the conditions.

As a support mode in the general electric accessory 303 of the second operating port 34, when compared in a situation where the launch of the game ball is continued in the same manner with respect to the game area PE, the general electric accessory 303 (the first) Low frequency support mode (low frequency support state) so that the frequency with which the two operating ports 34) are opened per unit time is relatively high and low, and / or the period during which the operating port 34) is open is relatively long and short. Alternatively, a low frequency guide state) and a high frequency support mode (high frequency support state or high frequency guide state) are set.

In the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role open state in the electric accessory open lottery using the electric accessory release counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 1/2). In the high frequency support mode, the number of times the general electric accessory 303 is opened when the electric service open state is won is set more than in the low frequency support mode, and one open period is set longer. Has been done. In this case, in the high-frequency support mode, when the electric service open state is won and the open state of the general electric accessory 303 occurs a plurality of times, from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state. The closing period is set shorter than one opening period. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time for the next electric accessory opening lottery to be held after one electric accessory opening lottery is set is shorter than that in the low-frequency support mode. Has been done.

As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability that the second operating port 34 is won is higher than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the first operating port 33 is higher than that of the second operating port 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the second operation is higher than the first operating port 33. The probability that a prize will be given to the mouth 34 increases. Then, when a prize is won in the second operating port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of balls held so much. It can be carried out.

In addition, in the high frequency support mode, the winning frequency to the second operating port 34 per unit time (for example, 1 minute) or the number of game balls per unit launch ball (for example, 100) is higher than that in the low frequency support mode. The configuration is not limited to the above, and may be configured to increase the probability of winning the electric service open state in, for example, the electric accessory open lottery. Further, the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode may be set by differentiating any one condition or an arbitrary combination of the number of times, the opening period, and the winning probability.

The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 114b of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. More specifically, it is stored in the holding area Ra for the first special figure display unit of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins in the first operating port 33, and the second of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins in the second operating port 34. It is stored in the holding area Rb for the special figure display unit.

The distribution destination of the game result with respect to the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a jackpot type table (distribution information group) in the distribution table storage area 113b as the distribution information group storage means in the ROM 113. Here, the contents of the jackpot type table will be described with reference to FIG. The jackpot type table shown in FIG. 12 shows the case where a prize is generated in the first operating port 33 (for the first special figure display unit AS) and the case where a prize is generated in the second operating port 34 (second special figure display). It is commonly used with (for BS).

As shown in FIG. 12, in the jackpot type table, 16R jackpot result A, 16R jackpot result B, and 16R jackpot result C are set as distribution destinations of game results (big hit type). Of these, 16R jackpot result A and 16R jackpot result B are probabilistic jackpot results, and 16R jackpot result C is a normal jackpot result (non-probable variable jackpot result).

In each of the 16R jackpot results A to 16R jackpot results C, a maximum of 16 round games are performed. However, the next round game is executed only when a V prize is generated during the execution of one round game, and if the round game is completed without the V prize being generated, the 16th round game is executed. The open / close execution mode ends even if the round game of is not reached. In the first round game, the number of winning balls to the variable winning device 32 (large winning opening 32a) reaches the upper limit winning number, and the opening period of the variable winning device 32 reaches the upper limit opening period. It ends when any of the conditions is met.

The 16R jackpot result A and the 16R jackpot result B are jackpot results in which the lottery mode is set to the high probability mode and the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode. In this case, the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode are continued until the next big hit occurs (until the next open / close execution mode is started). By the way, the lottery mode is set to the low probability mode and the support mode is set to the low frequency support mode while the open / close execution mode is being executed.

The 16R jackpot result C is a jackpot result in which the lottery mode is set to the low probability mode and the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode is completed. The high-frequency support mode set in this case continues until the number of executions of the special figure game times after shifting to the mode reaches the end reference number (for example, 100 times), and then the support mode is low-frequency support. Move to mode. In this case, the number of executions of the special figure game times is the total number of executions of the game times of the first special figure and the game times of the second special figure.

In relation to each of the above game states, the normal game state means a state in which the lottery mode is a low probability mode and the support mode is a low frequency support mode.

Here, in the present embodiment, the 16R jackpot results A to 16R jackpot results C are provided with differences in the lottery mode and the support mode after the opening / closing execution mode as described above, and in addition, each round game in the opening / closing execution mode is provided. There is a difference in the setting mode of the upper limit winning number (the number of winning balls to the variable winning device 32 that ends the round game). The setting mode of the maximum number of winnings in each round game for each jackpot result will be described in detail later.

In the jackpot type table, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 99", "0" to "19" correspond to the 16R jackpot result A, and "20" to "59" correspond to the 16R jackpot result B. "60" to "99" correspond to the 16R jackpot result C. That is, when the jackpot is won, the probability of the 16R jackpot result A is 20/100, and the probability of the 16R jackpot result B and the 16R jackpot result C is 400/100, respectively.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot type table common to the case where the first operating port 33 is won and the case where the second operating port 34 is won is used. A different jackpot type table may be used for the figure display unit AS and the second special figure display unit BS. Further, the allocation of the jackpot type counter C2 to each game result is not limited to that shown in FIG. 12, and can be arbitrarily set.

The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 238, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 238). The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 114b of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. More specifically, it is stored in the holding area Ra for the first special figure display unit of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins in the first operating port 33, and the second of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins in the second operating port 34. It is stored in the holding area Rb for the special figure display unit. Then, it is decided whether or not to generate the reach based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 113. However, in the game round of shifting to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 112 determines the reach generation regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. The number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of the reach display is the same in each game state, but may be set individually according to the game state. For example, when the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of the reach display may be set to be larger than that in the low frequency support mode.

Here, the reach display (reach state) is a game time in which a symbol display device 41 capable of performing variable display (or variable display) of a symbol (picture) is provided and the variable winning device 32 is opened / closed. In a gaming machine in which the stop display result after the variation display is a special display result, after the variation display (or variable display) of the symbol (picture) on the symbol display device 41 is started, before the stop display result is derived and displayed. , A display state for making the player think that the special display result is a variable display state.

In other words, by stopping and displaying some of the symbols among the plurality of symbol strings displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the open / close execution mode is established. It is a display state in which a combination of possible reach symbols is displayed, and in that state, the symbols are variablely displayed in the remaining symbol rows.

More specifically, as a pre-stage for ending the variation display of the symbol, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the open / close execution mode is established on the preset effective line in the display screen of the symbol display device 41. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying a combination of possible reach symbols, and in a situation where the reach line is formed, a variable display of symbols is performed by the final stop symbol sequence.

To specifically explain the display contents of FIG. 10, first, high-speed fluctuation display is started for all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In this case, it is difficult or impossible to recognize which symbol is displayed. After that, the variation display mode of the upper symbol sequence Z1 is switched from the high-speed variation display to the low-speed variation display in which the player can easily or can recognize the symbol displayed. Then, the variation display of the upper symbol sequence Z1 is completed, and the variation display mode of the lower symbol sequence Z3 is switched from the high-speed variation display to the low-speed variation display. After that, the variable display of the lower symbol sequence Z3 ends. In this case, the reach line is formed by stopping and displaying the main symbols with the same numbers on any of the effective lines L1 to L5. Then, when the fluctuation display of the middle symbol row Z2 is switched from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display and the open / close execution mode is generated, the main symbol with the same number as the main symbol forming the reach line is attached. Is stopped and displayed on the reach line, and the variation display of the symbols in the symbol row Z2 in the middle row is terminated.

Further, in the reach display, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the remaining symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to reach the reach. Includes those that perform an effect, and those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen after reducing or hiding the combination of reach symbols. In addition, when the reach display is performed, or before the reach display, it is determined whether or not to display the notice using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character by using the reach random number counter C3 or other counters. You may.

The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS determines in the MPU 112 the variation display time in the first special figure display unit AS and the second special figure display unit BS of the special figure display unit 43 and the variation display time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41. It is used to do. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time the normal processing described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal processing. Then, the variable type counter CS is stored in the reserved ball storage area 114b of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. More specifically, it is stored in the holding area Ra for the first special figure display unit of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins in the first operating port 33, and the second of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins in the second operating port 34. It is stored in the holding area Rb for the special figure display unit.

The electric accessory release counter C4 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 250, reach the maximum value (that is, 250), and then return to 0. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the electric service holding area 114c of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to control the general electric accessory 303 to the open state according to the value of the stored electric accessory release counter C4. For example, if C4 = 0 to 190, the utility accessory 303 is controlled to the open state, and if C4 = 191 to 250, the utility accessory 303 is not controlled to the open state.

In the MPU 112, the fluctuation display time in the first special figure display unit AS and the second special figure display unit BS is determined by using the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the execution area AE. The variable display time table storage area 113c of the ROM 113 is used. Further, in the MPU 112, the stop result in the first special figure display unit AS and the second special figure display unit BS is determined by using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. However, in making the determination, the stop result table storage area 113d of the ROM 113 is used.

<About various processes executed by the main controller 81>
Next, timer interrupt processing and normal processing executed for advancing the game by the MPU 112 in the main control device 81 will be described. In the MPU 112, in addition to the timer interrupt process and the normal process, the main process activated when the power is turned on and the NMI interrupt process activated by inputting a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal) are executed. The description of these processes will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is periodically (for example, at a 2 msec cycle) started by the MPU 112.

In step S101, reading processing of various detection sensors is executed. In the reading process, the states of the various detection sensors 31a, 33a, 34a, 35a, 507, 509 are read, the states of the various detection sensors 31a, 33a, 34a, 35a, 507, 509 are determined, and the detection information is saved. Execute the process. Further, when the winning of the game ball is detected by the various detection sensors 31a, 33a, 34a, 507, 509 corresponding to the generation of the prize ball, the payout control device 97 is instructed to pay out the prize ball. Set the prize ball command for. For example, when the V winning sensor 507 or the winning sensor 509 detects that the variable winning device 32 has won a prize, a prize ball command for instructing 15 prize balls, which is the corresponding number of prize balls, is set. .. In the following step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated.

In the following step S103, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the electric accessory opening counter C4 are each added by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values, they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1, C2, and C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 114.

In the following step S104, a winning process for through is executed in association with winning the through gate 35. In the through winning process, when the through gate 35 has been won, the number of winnings held in the electric service holding area 114c is less than the upper limit (for example, "4"). On condition that, the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 updated in step S103 is stored in the electric accessory holding area 114c.

In the following step S105, a winning process for the operating port is executed. In the winning process for the operating port, based on the winning of the game ball in any of the operating ports 33 and 34, a prize ball command for paying out the game ball based on the winning is set, and a jackpot random number counter is set. Information acquisition processing is performed to store the values of C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable type counter CS.

In the information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first operating port 33. When the first operating port 33 has won a prize, the number of hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first special figure display unit is grasped, and the grasped number is set as the first start hold storage number RaN. set. On the other hand, when the game ball has not won the first operating port 33, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the second operating port 34 (starting winning). When the second operating port 34 has won a prize, the number of hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second special figure display unit is grasped, and the grasped number is set as the second start hold storage number RbN. set. Then, it is determined whether or not the set start hold storage number N (RaN or RbN) is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). When the start hold storage number N is less than the upper limit value, the start hold storage number N in the corresponding result display hold area is updated to be incremented by 1. When the first start hold storage number RaN is set, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS is set to the hold area Ra for the first special figure display unit. When the second start hold storage number RbN is set, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable type counter CS are stored in the first storage area of the free storage area. Each value is stored in the first storage area of the free storage area of the holding area Rb for the second special figure display unit.

After executing the winning process for the operation port in step S105, the V winning process for detecting the occurrence of the V winning is executed in step S106, and then the timer interrupt process ends. The V prize processing will be described in detail later.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is started when the power is turned on is executed, and in the normal process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, the processes of steps S201 to S206 are executed as periodic processes having a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter update processes of steps S209 and S210 are executed in the remaining time.

In the normal processing, first, the external signal output processing is executed in step S201. In the external signal output process of step S201, output data such as a timer interrupt process or a command set in the previous normal process is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 97. If a command for effect is set, it is transmitted to the effect control device 82.

Next, in step S202, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 114.

In the following step S203, a game time control process for advancing the game of each game time is executed. In this game time control process, a hit / fail determination of a jackpot or the like and a distribution determination of a jackpot type are performed, and a variation display of a symbol is set by the symbol display device 41, a variation display is set by the special symbol display unit 43, and the like.

After executing the game turn control process in step S203, the process proceeds to step S204 to execute the game state transition process. By this game state transition process, the game state shifts to the open / close execution mode or the like. The details of the game turn control process in step S203 and the game state transition process in step S204 will be described later.

In the following step S205, an electric service support process for driving and controlling the general electric accessory 303 provided in the second operating port 34 is executed. In this electric service support process, the electric service of whether or not to open the general electric service object 303 by using the numerical information acquired from the electric service object release counter C4 stored in the electric service holding area 114c of the RAM 114. In addition to performing an open lottery, if the electric service open state is won, the opening / closing process of the general electric service object 303 is executed. In addition, the display control of the general drawing display unit 44 is performed so as to teach the lottery result of the electric service opening lottery.

After that, in step S206, the game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 53 is excited once in a predetermined period (for example, 0.6 sec) on condition that the launch permission signal is input from the power supply and the launch control device 98. .. As a result, the game ball is launched toward the game area.

In the following step S207, it is determined whether or not the power failure flag is set in the RAM 114. The power failure flag is a flag that is set when the occurrence of a power failure is confirmed on the power failure monitoring board 115 and a power failure signal is input from the power failure monitoring board 115 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 112, and is erased in the next main process.

If the power failure flag is not set, it means that the last processing of the plurality of processes to be repeatedly executed has been completed. Therefore, whether or not the execution timing of the next normal processing has been reached in step S208, that is, this time normal It is determined whether or not a predetermined period (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the process. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process.

That is, in step S209, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 114. Further, in step S210, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is added by 1, and when those counter values reach the maximum value, the counter values are cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 114.

Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S201 to S206 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1) can be randomly updated by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, and similarly. The variable type counter CS can also be updated at random.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S207 that the power failure flag is set, it means that the power supply has been cut off, so the power failure processing after step S211 is executed. That is, in step S211, the occurrence of timer interrupt processing is prohibited, then the RAM determination value is calculated and saved in step S212, access to the RAM 114 is prohibited in step S213, and then the power supply is completely shut off for processing. Continues an infinite loop until can no longer be executed.

<Game times control processing>
Next, the game rotation control process in step S203 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the game time control process, first, in step S301, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode flag is stored (stored) in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. The open / close execution mode flag is stored when the game state is shifted to the open / close execution mode in the game state transition process described later, and is deleted when the open / close execution mode is terminated in the game state transition process.

When the open / close execution mode is in progress, the main game is performed without executing any of the processes after step S302, that is, the process for starting the game times in steps S303 to S305 and the process for proceeding with the game times in steps S306 to S309. Time Control processing ends. That is, in the open / close execution mode, the game round is not started regardless of whether or not the operating ports 33 and 34 have been won.

If it is not in the open / close execution mode, it is determined in step S302 whether or not the special figure display unit 43 is in the variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether or not either the first special figure display unit AS or the second special figure display unit BS is in the variable display. This determination is performed by determining whether or not the variable display flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. The variation display flag is stored when the variation display is started for either the first special figure display unit AS or the second special figure display unit BS, and is deleted when the variation display ends.

If the special figure display unit 43 is not displaying the fluctuation, the process proceeds to the game round start process of steps S303 to S305. In the game round start process, first, in step S303, whether or not the common hold number CRN, which is the total number of start hold storage numbers of the first special figure display unit AS and the second special figure display unit BS, is "0". To judge. When the common hold number CRN is "0", it means that the start hold storage numbers RaN and RbN are "0" for both the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34. Therefore, the game times control process is terminated as it is.

If the common hold number CRN is not "0", the data stored in the hold area Ra for the first special figure display unit or the hold area Rb for the second special figure display unit is set for variable display in step S304. Execute the data setting process for this. In the following step S305, the variation start process for starting the variation display on the special figure display unit 43 and the variation display on the symbol display device 41 is executed, and then the game round control process is ended.

Here, the fluctuation start processing in step S305 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 16A.

In the fluctuation start process, first, in step S401, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag (high probability state information) is stored (stored) in the various flag storage areas 114e provided in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. When the probability variation jackpot result is obtained, the high probability mode flag is stored at the end of the open / close execution mode corresponding to the jackpot result, and then a transition to a new open / close execution mode occurs, and when the open / close execution mode is started. It is a flag to be erased.

If the mode is not in the high probability mode, the pass / fail judgment is performed in step S402 with reference to the pass / fail table for the low probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches one of the two values set as the jackpot winning value in the winning / failing table for the low probability mode. To judge. On the other hand, in the case of the high probability mode, the pass / fail judgment is performed in step S403 with reference to the pass / fail table for the high probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches any of the 20 values set as the jackpot winning values in the winning / failing table for the high probability mode. To judge.

After the execution of step S402 or step S403, in steps S404 to S411, a process for setting the game result (big hit type) of the current game time, or the first special figure display unit AS or the first special figure display unit AS in the current game time. A process for setting a stop result when the variable display executed by any of the second special figure display units BS is terminated is executed. In this case, when setting the stop result, various stop result tables (stop result information group) stored in the stop result table storage area 113d of the ROM 113 are referred to.

Specifically, first, in step S404, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery in step S402 or step S403 is a big hit. If the jackpot is won, the process proceeds to step S405, and the jackpot type distribution determination is performed with reference to the jackpot type table (see FIG. 12). Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE in the reserved ball storage area 114b of the RAM 114 is the numerical range of the 16R jackpot result A, the numerical range of the 16R jackpot result B, and the 16R jackpot result C. Determine which of the numerical ranges is included.

In the following step S406, the stop result table for jackpots (FIG. 16B) stored in the stop result table storage area 113d of the ROM 113 is referred to, and the special figure display unit 43 (first special figure display unit AS or the first special figure display unit AS or the first 2 Set the stop result for the jackpot to be displayed on the special figure display unit BS). Specifically, when the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numerical range (“0” to “19”) of the 16R jackpot result A, the stop result is When the stop result A is set and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is included in the numerical range (“20” to “59”) of the 16R jackpot result B, the stop result B is set as the stop result. When the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is included in the numerical range (“60” to “99”) of the 16R jackpot result B, the stop result C is set as the stop result. The stop result A to the stop result C are stop results in which the display mode or display content of the pattern displayed on the special drawing display unit 43 is different.

In the following step S407, various jackpot flags are stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 based on the distribution result of the step S405. Specifically, when the distribution result is the 16R jackpot result A, the 16R flag A is stored, and when the distribution result is the 16R jackpot result B, the 16R flag B is stored, and the distribution result is 16R. If the jackpot result is C, the 16R flag C is stored.

If a negative determination is made in step S404, the process proceeds to step S408, and the stop result for disengagement is displayed on the special figure display unit 43 (first special figure display unit AS or second special figure display unit BS). Set.

After executing the process of step S407 or step S408, the variation display time of the special figure game times this time is set in step S409. In the variation display time setting process, the value of the variation type counter CS is acquired, and the variation display time corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS is selected from the variation display time table stored in the ROM 113.

In the following step S410, a variation command including information on the variation display time and a type command including information on the game result (big hit type, etc.) are set. The set variation command and type command are transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 14). The effect control device 82 transmits the received command to the display control device 212 while maintaining the information form. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 212 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 and the like so as to start the effect of the game times.

After that, in step S411, among the first special figure display unit AS and the second special figure display unit BS, the variable display of the pattern is started in the display unit corresponding to the current game times. After that, the fluctuation start process is terminated.

Returning to the description of the game times control process (FIG. 15), when an affirmative decision is made in step S302, that is, when the special figure display unit 43 is in the variable display, the game times progress process of steps S306 to S309. To execute. In the game round progress process, first, in step S306, it is determined whether or not the variation display time of the current game round has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation display time information stored in the fluctuation display time counter area of the RAM 114 is "0". The value of the fluctuation display time information is set in the fluctuation start processing at the start of the game round. Further, the value of the set fluctuation display time information is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13) is activated.

If the variation display time has not elapsed, the variation display process is executed in step S307. In the variable display processing, the display control (light emission control of each display segment) is performed so that each display segment is turned on and off in a predetermined order in the special figure display unit related to the current game round. , Ends this game time control process.

If the fluctuation display time has elapsed, the fluctuation end processing is executed in step S308. In the fluctuation end processing, the information set based on the result of the lottery for winning or failing the fluctuation start processing is specified, and the special figure display so that the pattern corresponding to the information is stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 43. The unit 43 is controlled.

In the following step S309, the variable end command is set. After that, the game round control process is terminated. The variation end command set in step S309 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 14). The effect control device 82 transmits the received fluctuation end command to the display control device 212 while maintaining the information form. When the display control device 212 receives the change end command, the combination of the final stop symbols in the game round is confirmed and displayed (final stop display).

The design (stop result) of the special figure display unit 43 that has been stopped and displayed (confirmed) as described above continues to be displayed for a predetermined stop display period. In addition, the stop result for the jackpot corresponding to the jackpot continues to be displayed even after the end of the special figure game (after the above stop display period has elapsed), and is continuously displayed during the execution of the open / close execution mode corresponding to the jackpot. Will be done. Then, the stop display state is released when the open / close execution mode ends and the first special figure game round (variable display of the special figure) after the open / close execution mode is started.

<Game state transition process>
Next, the game state transition process in step S204 in the normal process (FIG. 14) will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 22.

As shown in FIG. 17, in the game state transition process, first, in step S501, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in progress. If it is not in the open / close execution mode, the process proceeds to step S502, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing at which the variation display of the pattern on the first special figure display unit AS or the second special figure display unit BS of one game is completed. If it is not the timing when the variation display is finished, the game state transition process is finished as it is.

When the variation display is finished, in step S503, it is determined whether or not the game result of the current game times corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode. If it does not correspond to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

If it corresponds to the transition of the open / close execution mode, the start process of the open / close execution mode is executed in step S504. In the start process, it is checked that the variable winning device 32 is in the closed state before the start of the open / close execution mode. Further, in the opening / closing execution mode start processing, an opening period setting process for waiting without starting the opening of the variable winning device 32 at the start of the opening / closing execution mode is executed. In the opening period setting process, the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is set with the waiting period information for the opening stored in advance in the ROM 113. The value of the timer counter T is decremented by 1 in a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec cycle, each time the timer interrupt process is activated).

In the following step S505, the value of the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is set, and the number of rounds to be executed in the current open / close execution mode is set. In the present embodiment, since the number of rounds corresponding to each jackpot result is 16, "16" is set as the value of the round counter RC.

In the following step S506, as the start processing of the round display, the round display unit RS controls so that the number of rounds of the open / close execution mode to be executed this time (“16” in any jackpot result in the present embodiment) is displayed. The display of the number of rounds continues until the open / close execution mode ends.

In the following step S507, an opening command is set. This set opening command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 14). The effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed. The content of this effect includes a display mode in the symbol display device 41, and the determined display mode is output from the effect control device 82 to the display control device 212 as a display content command. The display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that the display (for example, moving image display) corresponding to the current opening / closing execution mode is performed based on the display content command received from the effect control device 82.

Then, in step S508, after executing the external signal setting process, the game state transition process ends. In the external signal setting process, the signal output state of the output terminal for the jackpot signal provided in the external output terminal 99 is set to the jackpot signal output state. As a result, when the output terminal for the jackpot signal is connected to the management control device on the game hall side, the jackpot signal is output to the management control device, and the pachinko machine 10 generates a jackpot in the management control device. You can grasp what you have done.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S501 (when the open / close execution mode is in progress), the process proceeds to step S509 to determine whether or not the waiting period for opening has elapsed. If the waiting period for the opening has not elapsed, the game state transition process is terminated as it is. If the waiting period for the opening has elapsed, the large winning opening opening / closing process is executed in step S510. Here, the large winning opening opening / closing process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the large winning opening opening / closing process, first, in step S601, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "0". If the value of the round counter RC is "0", the large winning opening opening / closing process is terminated, while if the value of the round counter RC is not "0", the large winning opening 32a is opened in step S602. Whether or not (whether or not the variable winning device 32 is in the open state) is determined. In this step, such a determination process is executed based on the driving state of the driving unit 305 for the variable winning device.

If the large winning opening 32a is not opened, the process proceeds to step S603, and it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter T is “0”. If the value of the timer counter T is not "0", the large winning opening opening / closing process is terminated, while if the value of the timer counter T is "0", the process proceeds to step S604. In step S604, a setting process for each round is executed to set the upper limit opening period of the variable winning device 32 and the upper limit winning number of the variable winning device 32 in each round game in the open / close execution mode.

In the following step S605, the drive unit 305 is set to the drive state in order to open the variable winning device 32. After that, the opening command is set in step S606, and the large winning opening opening / closing process is completed. The release command set in this step is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 14). The effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect corresponding to each round based on the received release command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S602 (when the large winning opening 32a is open), the process proceeds to step S607, and it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter T is "0". The value of the timer counter T in this case corresponds to the upper limit opening period of the variable winning device 32 set in step S604, and in this step, has the opening period of the large winning opening 32a reached the upper limit opening period? It is to judge whether or not.

If the value of the timer counter T is not "0" (when the opening period of the large winning opening 32a has not reached the upper limit opening period), the detection state of the V winning sensor 507 or the winning sensor 509 (step) in step S608. Based on the reading results of various sensors in S101), it is determined whether or not a prize has been generated in the variable winning device 32. If the variable winning device 32 has not been won, the large winning opening opening / closing process is terminated, while if the variable winning device 32 has been won, the process proceeds to step S609, and various counter areas of the RAM 114 are used. The value of the winning counter PC provided at 114d is decremented by 1. The winning counter PC is a counter for counting the number of winning games balls to the variable winning device 32, and after the value corresponding to the upper limit winning number is set in step S604, the variable winning device 32 is won. Is decremented one by one each time. In the following step S610, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114.

Here, the V winning process in step S106 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the V winning process, first, in step S701, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e. If the V winning flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S702, and V winning is generated based on the detection state of the V winning sensor 507 provided in the variable winning device 32 (reading result of various sensors in step S101). Whether or not (whether or not the game ball has passed through the detection area of the V winning sensor 507) is determined.

If it is determined that the V prize has occurred, it is determined in step S703 whether or not the V prize is valid. The valid period is a predetermined period that is predetermined in anticipation of a period in which V prizes can be normally generated. For example, the execution period of the round game is set as the valid period. If it is determined that the validity period is not in effect, the process proceeds to step S704, an error command is set assuming that an error has occurred, and then the V winning process is terminated. The set error command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process of the normal process (FIG. 14), and the effect control device 82 emits light from the display control device 212 so that a predetermined error notification is executed. The unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 are controlled.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the validity period is in effect, the process proceeds to step S705, and the V winning flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. In the following step S706, a V winning command is set as a transmission target to the effect control device 82. The V prize command is a command for notifying the effect control device 82 that a V prize has occurred, and the set V prize command is sent to the effect control device 82 by the external output process of the normal process (FIG. 14). Will be sent. When the effect control device 82 receives the V prize command, the pattern display device 41, the light emitting unit 63, and the speaker unit 64 execute an effect of notifying the occurrence of the V prize or congratulating the V prize. In this way, the display control device 212 and the like are controlled.

After the execution of step S706, if an affirmative determination is made in step S701 (when the V winning flag is stored) or a negative determination is made in step S702 (when no V winning is generated), the V winning process is terminated. ..

Returning to the description of the large winning opening opening / closing process (FIG. 18), if it is determined in step S610 that the V winning flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S611. In step S611, the V winning flag stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 is erased, and the continuation flag is set in the various flag storage areas 114e. The continuation flag is a flag indicating that the next round game should be executed, in other words, the open / close execution mode should be continued even after the running round game is completed.

In the following step S612, "0" is set to the value of the winning counter PC provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114. That is, in the present embodiment, when a V prize is generated, the value of the prize counter PC is forcibly set to "0" regardless of the value of the prize counter PC at that time.

After the execution of step S612 or when a negative determination is made in step S610 (when V winning has not occurred), it is determined in step S613 whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is "0". If it is determined that the value of the winning counter PC is not "0", the large winning opening opening / closing process is terminated. If it is determined that the value of the winning counter PC is "0" or if it is determined affirmatively in step S607 (when the value of the timer counter is "0"), the process proceeds to step S614 and the variable winning device 32 is pressed. The drive unit 305 is set to the non-drive state in order to close it.

In the following step S615, it is determined whether or not the continuation flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. When the continuation flag is stored, in step S616, the value of the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is decremented by 1, and the number of rounds in the open / close execution mode is updated. In the following step S617, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter RC is “0”. If the value of the round counter RC is not "0", the waiting period between rounds (round interval period), that is, the closing period until the variable winning device 32 is opened again is set in step S618. Specifically, the value of the timer counter T is set to "1000" corresponding to the waiting period (2 sec).

After that, the closing command is set in step S619, and the large winning opening opening / closing process is completed. The closing command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S201 of the normal process (FIG. 14). The effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the waiting period between rounds based on the received closing command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed.

If it is determined in step S617 that the value of the round counter RC is "0", the ending start process is executed in step S620. In the start process, an ending waiting period for waiting without starting the next game round for the ending of the open / close execution mode is set. Specifically, the timer counter T is set with the waiting period information for the ending stored in advance in the ROM 113.

After that, in step S621, the ending command is set, and the large winning opening opening / closing process is completed. The ending command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 14). The effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the end of the open / close execution mode based on the received ending command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed.

If it is determined in step S615 that the continuation flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S622, and the value of the round counter RC is set to "0" in order to end the open / close execution mode. After that, the process proceeds to step S620 to execute the ending process.

Next, the setting process for each round in step S604 in the large winning opening opening / closing process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In this setting process, first, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "16". That is, it is determined whether or not the round game to be set is the first round game in the open / close execution mode. If the value of the round counter RC is not "16", that is, the round game to be set is the second and subsequent round games, the continuation stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 in step S802. Clear the flag.

After the execution of step S802 or when a positive determination is made in step S801 (when the value of the round counter RC is "16"), the opening period of the variable winning device 32 in the round game to be set is set in step S803. .. Specifically, the value of the timer counter T is set to "15000", which corresponds to the upper limit opening period (30 sec) for one round.

In the following step S804, the jackpot type corresponding to the open / close execution mode being executed or being executed is grasped based on the jackpot type flag stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. For example, when the 16R jackpot A flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e, the 16R jackpot result A is grasped as the jackpot type corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode. Further, in this step, based on the value of the round counter RC, it is grasped which round game the round game to be set (the round game to be started from now on) is the round game. In the following step S805, the maximum number of winnings to the variable winning device 32 in the round game to be set is set with reference to the upper limit numbering table stored in the sorting table storage area 113b of the ROM 113.

Here, the upper limit number distribution table will be described with reference to FIG. In the maximum number distribution table, the maximum number of winnings for each round game is specified for each jackpot type. The maximum number of winnings corresponding to the 16R jackpot result A is 8 in any round game, and is unified among the rounds. On the other hand, as for the maximum number of winnings corresponding to the 16R jackpot result B and the 16R jackpot result C, the maximum number of winnings is diversified between the rounds so that the maximum number of winnings is different in each round game. That is, in a predetermined round game, the upper limit winning number is the first number, and in other round games, the upper limit winning number is a second number different from the first number, and so on. The number of winnings varies. Further, in the 16R jackpot result B and the 16R jackpot result C, for example, the maximum number of winnings in the second round game is 4 in the former case and 2 in the latter case, and so on. The maximum number of winnings in round games is different.

With the above configuration, for example, when focusing on the second round round game, the player may end the round game when eight game balls are won in the variable winning device 32. In some cases, the round game ends when four game balls win, and in some cases, the round game ends when two game balls win. Therefore, how many prizes are allowed in the round game? It cannot be uniquely determined. Therefore, the player predicts the maximum number of winnings in each round game and plays the game.

The specific maximum number of winning prizes shown in FIG. 21 is only an example, and is not limited to these numbers. Further, although the maximum number of winnings in each round game of 16R jackpot result A is set to the same number in all round games, it may be different depending on the round game such as 16R jackpot result B and 16R jackpot result C. At that time, it is assumed that the maximum number of winnings in the round games in the same order is different from that of the 16R jackpot result B and the 16R jackpot result C.

Returning to the explanation of the setting process for each round (FIG. 20), in step S805, the result of grasping the jackpot type in the above step S804 and the round game to be set is the round game of which round, and the above upper limit number swing. Based on the minute table, the corresponding maximum number of winnings is derived. In the following step S806, a value corresponding to the above-derived upper limit winning number is set as the value of the winning counter PC provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114. For example, when the jackpot type is 16R jackpot result B, the round game to be set is the 7th round game, and the derived upper limit winning number is 5, the value of the winning counter PC is "5". "Is set. After the execution of step S806, the setting process for each round ends.

Returning to the description of the game state transition process (FIG. 17), after executing the large winning opening opening / closing process in step S510, it is determined in step S511 whether or not the round counter RC is “0”. If the value of the round counter RC is not "0", the game state transition process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the value of the round counter RC is "0", the timer counter T determines whether or not the waiting period for the ending has expired in step S512. If the waiting period for the ending has not ended, the game state transition process ends as it is. On the other hand, when the waiting period for the ending has expired, the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode is executed in step S513. In the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode, the lottery mode and the support mode after the open / close execution mode are set.

Specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 22, first, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the 16R jackpot flag A or the 16R jackpot flag B is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. When the 16R jackpot flag A or the 16R jackpot flag B is stored, the process proceeds to step S902, the jackpot flag stored in the various flag storage areas 114e is deleted, and the high probability mode flag is set in the area 114e. set. As a result, the lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode.

In the following step S903, the high frequency support mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. As a result, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. The high-probability mode flag and the high-frequency support mode flag set in steps S902 and S903, respectively, are deleted in step S504 (FIG. 17) at the time of the next big hit winning.

If a negative determination is made in step S901 (when the 16R jackpot flag A or the 16R jackpot flag B is not stored), the process proceeds to step S904, and the high frequency support mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. In the following step S905, "100" is set in the game count counter GC provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114. This game count counter GC is subtracted by 1 each time the special figure game round is executed while the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. Then, when the game count counter GC becomes “0”, the high-frequency support mode flags set in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 are erased. That is, the high-frequency support mode ends, and the support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode.

After executing the process of step S903 or step S905, the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode ends.

Returning to the description of the game state transition process (FIG. 17), after executing the process of step S513, the process for ending the display of the round display unit RS is executed in step S514. Next, in step S515, the end processing of the open / close execution mode is executed, and then the main game state transition process is ended. In the end processing of the open / close execution mode, the transition to the open / close execution mode and the deletion of various counters and flags used in the open / close execution mode are performed.

<About the flow of the game in the open / close execution mode>
Next, the flow of the game in the open / close execution mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 5, 23 and 24.

As described above, in the present embodiment, if the V prize is not generated in the running round game, the next round game is not executed, and if the round game ends without the V prize being generated, at that time. The open / close execution mode is configured to end (see FIG. 18). Further, when a V prize is generated during the round game, the round game is configured to end at the time when the V prize is generated even if the number of prizes to the variable winning device 32 does not reach the upper limit number of prizes. (See FIG. 18). Therefore, if the maximum number of winnings is n, V winning is not generated until the n-1th winning, and V winning is generated at the nth winning, so that the player can win in one round game. While maximizing the total number of prize balls that can be played, the right to execute the next round game can be obtained.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 5 and 23, in the large winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32, there are a left entrance portion 505 that does not generate a V winning and a right entrance portion 504 that does not generate a V winning. It is provided. Further, on the upstream side of the variable winning device 32, a game ball launched with a strength less than a predetermined amount is guided to the left entrance portion 505, and a game ball launched with a strength equal to or more than a predetermined amount is guided to the right entrance portion 504. A guide passage portion 401 is provided to guide the user.

In such a configuration, when the player adjusts the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 60 and launches the game ball with the strength of passing through the inner passage portion 404, the variable winning device 32 is on the left side in the open state. A game ball wins a prize at the entrance 505. In this case, the number of prizes to be won in the variable prize device 32 is counted up and a predetermined number (15) of prize balls are paid out, but no V prize is generated. On the other hand, when the game ball is launched with the strength to pass through the outer passage portion 403, the game ball wins the right entrance portion 504 in the state where the variable winning device 32 is in the open state. In this case, the number of prizes to be won in the variable winning device 32 is counted up, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out, and V prizes are generated. Therefore, the player can select at what timing the V prize is generated while the variable prize device 32 is made to win the game ball and the prize ball is acquired. Then, as a player, the game ball is launched with the strength to enter the left entrance portion 505 until the n-1th prize, and the game ball is launched with the strength to enter the right entrance portion 504 with the nth prize. The ideal operation mode is to perform the switching operation so as to do so.

Under such a configuration, in the present embodiment, the player cannot or is difficult to determine the maximum number of winnings for each round game in the open / close execution mode. Specifically, the maximum number of prizes for each round game is diversified, so that the player cannot uniquely determine the maximum number of prizes for each round game. Moreover, since the maximum number of winnings is diversified not only in the opening / closing execution mode of 1, but also between the jackpot types, it is becoming more difficult for the player to understand the maximum number of winnings in each round game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the notification (display or voice output) that the player can recognize the maximum number of winnings in each round game is not executed, and the maximum number of winnings is not specified. For this reason, the player cannot obtain information on the maximum number of winnings by notification, and it is more difficult to determine the maximum number of winnings in each round game.

Further, in the present embodiment, regardless of the maximum number of winnings, the opening mode (opening number of times and upper limit opening period) of the variable winning device 32 in each round game is standardized. For this reason, it is impossible or difficult for the player to determine the maximum number of winnings from the behavior of the variable winning device 32, and it is more difficult to grasp the maximum number of winnings for each round game.

From these facts, the player has no choice but to predict the maximum number of winnings in each round game in each round game, and based on the prediction result, the left entrance portion 505 and the right entrance portion 504 are targeted separately. You will play a game.

Here, with reference to FIG. 24, the relationship between the launch operation mode of the player and the game result will be described. Here, as shown in FIG. 24A, the operation of firing the game ball at the strength at which the game ball wins at the left entrance portion 505 where the V prize does not occur is called the first operation, and the operation of firing the game ball at the right side where the V prize occurs is called the first operation. The operation of firing the game ball at the entrance 504 with the strength that the game ball wins is called the second operation, and the first operation is performed until the n-1th prize is won, and the second operation is performed with the nth prize. The operation is called a specific operation.

When the open / close execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result A is executed, the maximum number of winnings is set to 8 in all round games (see FIG. 21). In this case, as shown in FIG. 24 (b), when the specific operation is performed in all the round games, all the round games from the first round to the 16th round are performed, and the maximum in each round game. The number of prize balls paid out (15 prize balls x 8 prizes = 90) can be obtained. Therefore, in the open / close execution mode, a total number of prize balls of 90 × 16 rounds = 1920 can be obtained.

As described above, since the maximum number of winnings in each round game cannot be determined or is difficult to determine from the player's point of view, it is not easy to perform the above operation. For this reason, it is assumed that some players give priority to continuing the round (execution of the open / close execution mode until the final round) rather than the number of prize balls paid out per round. In this case, the aim is to win the right entrance portion 504 from the first prize in each round game, that is, the second operation is performed in all round games, but in this case, the total prize in the open / close execution mode. The number of balls is 15 x 16 rounds = 240. Therefore, the total number of prize balls obtained in the open / close execution mode is significantly reduced as compared with the case where a specific operation is performed in all round games.

When the open / close execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result B is executed, the maximum number of winnings in each round game is diversified in the mode, and each number is set as shown in FIG. In this case, when the specific operation is performed in all the round games, as shown in FIG. 24 (c), 15 prize balls x 92 prizes = 1380 total prize balls can be obtained. Further, when the second operation is performed in all the round games, the number is 240 as in the case of FIG. 24 (b).

Here, a player who is thinking of obtaining the maximum number of prize balls paid out in each round game and continuing the round game until the final round is executing the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result B. In, for example, if the maximum number of winnings in the second round is predicted to be eight, the player will continue to perform the first operation until the fourth winning, which is the actual maximum number of winnings. In this case, since the V prize is not generated in the second round game, the third round game is not executed and the open / close execution mode ends when the second round game ends (so-called puncture). Will be). In this case, the total number of prize balls in the open / close execution mode is limited to 15 prize balls x 12 prizes = 180 pieces, and the number of prize balls is smaller than that in the case where the second operation is performed in all round games.

However, if the open / close execution mode executed in this case corresponds to the 16R jackpot result A, the open / close execution mode does not end in the second round, and 1920 pieces are as described above. There is a high possibility that the total number of prize balls will be obtained. In other words, for a player who has the courage to play a game with the aim of obtaining the maximum number of total prize balls, if the prediction is correct, a big profit can be obtained, and conversely, the prediction is wrong. If so, it will be a small profit.

Further, when the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result C is executed, the upper limit winning number of each round game is diversified even in this mode, and is set to each number shown in FIG. In this case, when the specific operation is performed in all the round games, as shown in FIG. 24D, 15 prize balls x 95 prizes = 1425 total prize balls can be obtained. Further, when the second operation is performed in all the round games, the number is 240 as in the cases of FIGS. 24 (b) and 24 (c).

In addition, a player who is thinking of obtaining the maximum number of prize balls paid out in each round game and continuing the round game until the final round predicts, for example, that the maximum number of prizes in the second round is eight, and actually When the first operation is performed up to the second prize, which is the maximum number of prizes in, the open / close execution mode ends when the second round game is completed. In this case, the total number of prize balls in the open / close execution mode is limited to 15 prize balls x 10 prizes = 150, and when the second operation is performed in all round games or when the opening / closing execution corresponds to the 16R jackpot result B. In the situation where the mode is executed, the number of prize balls is smaller than when the open / close execution mode ends in the second round.

Although detailed description is omitted, in addition to the above operation modes, for example, the second operation is performed for the second prize in each round game, and the first operation is performed up to the third in a certain round game. In other round games, it is possible to perform various operation modes such as performing the second operation up to the fourth one. Even in these cases, the total number of prize balls obtained by the opening / closing execution mode differs due to variations in the number of prize balls paid out in each round and how long the opening / closing execution mode continues in relation to the maximum number of winnings each time. Will be the one to do.

With the above configuration, it is possible to realize a so-called chicken race-like playability in which the maximum number of winnings in each round game is predicted and the timing of performing the second operation is selected and enjoyed. .. Therefore, it is preferably suppressed that the game in the open / close execution mode becomes monotonous, and the game in the mode can be greatly excited.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

In the opening / closing execution mode of 1, the first round game in which the maximum number of winnings to the variable winning device 32 is the first number (for example, 8) (for example, the first round in the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result B). In the open / close execution mode corresponding to the round game) and the second round game (for example, 16R jackpot result B) in which the upper limit winning number to the variable winning device 32 is a second number (for example, 4) different from the first number. The configuration includes the second round game).

According to the above configuration, since the maximum number of winnings for each round game is diversified, it becomes difficult for the player to understand the maximum number of winnings for each round game, and the maximum number of winnings for each round game is predicted and enjoyed. Can be provided. As a result, the monotonousness of the game in the open / close execution mode is suppressed, and it becomes possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

If the predetermined condition (generation of V winning) is satisfied during the execution of the round game, the privilege (continuation of the round) is given, but the number of winning balls of the game ball to the variable winning device 32 has not reached the upper limit winning number. Even in the situation, the round game is finished.

In this case, if the predetermined condition is satisfied at an early stage of the round game, the round game ends early, so that the predetermined condition is satisfied at the timing when the upper limit winning number of winnings to the variable winning device 32 occurs or at a timing close to it. In some cases, the benefits can be obtained while continuing the round game for a long time, which is ideal for the player. In this case, since the maximum number of winnings in each round game is diversified, it is not uniform how many winnings correspond to the maximum number of winnings, and the timing at which the ideal predetermined condition is established varies. Will be. Therefore, it is possible not only to predict the maximum number of winnings, but also to expect that a predetermined condition is satisfied at an ideal timing. Therefore, each round game can be made much more interesting than the case where the round game is simply digested, and the game in the open / close execution mode can be greatly excited.

It is assumed that the above predetermined conditions can be satisfied based on the operation of the player. In this case, the player can be involved in the timing at which the predetermined condition is satisfied. As a result, it is possible to enhance the interest of each round game and to promote active participation in the game, as compared with the case of just checking whether or not the predetermined conditions are satisfied.

When the game ball passes through the specific area (detection area of the V winning sensor 507), the above-mentioned predetermined condition is satisfied, and the specific area is reached at a position where the game ball launched with a strength that can reach the variable winning device 32 can be reached. Was configured to be placed. In this case, the predetermined condition can be satisfied while the game ball is won by the variable winning device 32, and the game in the open / close execution mode and the game in which the predetermined condition is satisfied can be suitably compatible with each other. As a result, for example, when trying to satisfy the predetermined conditions, the probability of winning the variable winning device 32 decreases, and the predetermined conditions are set during the execution of each round game while suppressing the game in the open / close execution mode from being impaired. It becomes possible to add a game to be established.

In addition, the specific area is arranged in the variable winning device 32. In this case, the points of interest of the player are aggregated, and both whether or not the game ball has won the variable winning device 32 and whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied (whether or not the game ball has passed through a specific area). Can be visually recognized without moving the line of sight. As a result, it is possible to prevent the variable winning device 32 from being won and whether or not the game ball has passed through the specific area, so that the player can easily play the game.

In the large winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32, a right entrance portion 504 in which the game ball passes through the specific area and a left entrance portion 505 in which the game ball does not pass through the specific area are provided, and a first firing operation (predetermined amount) is provided. The game ball launched by the above strength (operation to launch the game ball with the above strength) can enter the right entrance portion 504, and is launched by the second launch operation (operation to launch the game ball with a strength less than a predetermined amount). A guide passage portion 401 for guiding the game ball is provided so that the game ball can enter the left entrance portion 505.

According to this configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not to pass the game ball through the specific area, so that the player can determine the timing at which the predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game in which the player predicts the maximum number of winnings and satisfies the predetermined condition by himself / herself at the timing corresponding to the prediction result. In such a game, if the timing at which the player satisfies the predetermined condition is earlier than the actual maximum number of winnings, the privilege is obtained, but the round game ends earlier. On the contrary, if the timing at which the predetermined condition is satisfied is later than the actual maximum number of winnings, the round game ends without obtaining the privilege. In this way, since the profit obtained in the round game changes depending on the prediction result of the player, the fun of playing by predicting the maximum number of winnings in each round game is preferably enhanced, and the interest of the open / close execution mode is enhanced. It can be greatly improved.

In the present embodiment, the game ball launched by the first launch operation is likely to enter the right entrance portion 504, and the game ball launched by the second launch operation is likely to enter the left entrance portion 505 (). Although it is not impossible to enter the right entrance portion 504, it may be difficult to enter the right entrance portion 504 as compared with the case of the first launch operation).

As a grant of the above benefits, it is assumed that the next round game after the round game in which the predetermined conditions are satisfied is executed. Where the player can determine the timing for establishing the predetermined condition by deciding whether or not to pass the game ball through the specific area, if the predetermined condition is satisfied at an early timing with priority given to the continuation of the round, it will open and close. Even if the execution mode can be completed, the total number of prize balls obtained can be kept small. On the other hand, if the timing for establishing the predetermined condition is extended to the limit in order to increase the number of prize balls in the round game for one round, the opening / closing execution mode may end in the middle. That is, it is possible to realize a game like a so-called chicken race in which courage is tested after predicting the maximum number of winnings in each round game, and it is possible to provide a highly interesting opening / closing execution mode.

The maximum number of winnings in each round game is not notified. In this case, in combination with the diversification of the maximum number of winnings in each round game, it is possible for the player to make it impossible or difficult for the player to determine the maximum number of winnings in each round, and the maximum number of winnings is predicted. It becomes possible to complement the game to be played.

In the present embodiment, the upper limit winning number is not notified for all the round games executed in the open / close execution mode, but the upper limit winning number may not be notified only for some round games. This is because even in this case, the game that predicts the maximum number of winnings is guaranteed in the round game in which the maximum number of winnings is not notified.

By the way, in the present embodiment, since the stop result (stop result A to stop result C) of the special figure in the special figure display unit 43 is made to correspond to the maximum number of winnings in each round game, the special figure display unit 43 It is also possible to determine the maximum number of winnings for each round game by referring to the stop result displayed in. In that sense, it can be said that specific notification is performed so that the player can recognize the maximum number of winnings in each round game.

However, the specific notification based on the stop result does not directly notify the maximum number of winnings, but is only an indirect notification. For this reason, it is not possible for anyone to easily determine the maximum number of winnings, and the games for which the maximum number of winnings for each round game is predicted and enjoyed are not excessively hindered. In particular, it is possible to determine the maximum number of winnings from the stop result only when the player knows all the correspondence between the type of stop result and the maximum number of winnings in each round game. This can be an opportunity for a person to deepen their interest in and knowledge of this pachinko machine 10, which in turn can lead to arousing motivation for playing.

In addition, such a configuration can effectively function as a countermeasure against fraud. For example, when a fraudulent act such as operating the pachinko machine 10 with a maximum number of winnings different from the normally set maximum number of winnings is performed, an employee of the game hall displays the stop result of the special drawing display unit 43. By visually recognizing, it is possible to determine the discrepancy in the maximum number of winnings. Therefore, it can contribute to the early detection of fraudulent activity.

<Second Embodiment>
The present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the player can recognize the maximum number of winnings in each round game. The present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 to 31. In these figures, the same components as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

<Production processing for open / close execution mode>
First, the effect processing for the open / close execution mode executed by the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is for executing the game effect in the open / close execution mode, and is executed as a part of the periodic process activated by the MPU 242 every predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec).

In the opening / closing execution mode effect processing, first, in step S1101, it is determined whether or not an opening command is received as a transmission command from the main control device 81. As described above, the command received from the main control unit 81 is stored in the command storage area of the RAM 244, and in this step, whether or not the information corresponding to the opening command is stored in the command storage area. The above judgment is made by confirming.

If the opening command has been received, the process proceeds to step S1102 to execute the setting process of the opening effect. In this step, various devices are controlled so that the opening effect is executed. After the execution of step S1102, the effect processing for the open / close execution mode is terminated.

If the opening command has not been received, step S1103 determines whether or not it is the start timing of the round game. The method for determining whether or not it is the start timing of the round game is not particularly limited, but for example, the start timing of the round game is determined by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81 such as the setting process (FIG. 20) for each round. In the process executed in, a process of setting a round start command indicating the start of the round game is provided, and in this step, the above determination can be made by confirming whether or not it is the reception timing of the round start command. it can. In the present embodiment, since the variable winning device 32 is opened once in one round game, the release command set in step S606 of FIG. 18 may be used as a substitute for the round start command.

If it is the start timing of the round game, the process proceeds to step S1104, and the round start process to be executed according to the start timing of the round game is executed. After the execution of step S1104, the effect processing for the open / close execution mode is terminated. The details of the round start processing will be described later.

If it is not the start timing of the round game, step S1105 determines whether or not the round game is in progress. The determination of whether or not a round game is in progress is made by determining whether or not the state is after receiving the above-mentioned round start command or open command and before receiving the round end command or close command described later. ,It can be carried out. If the game is in a round game, the process for during the round is executed in step S1106, and then the effect process for the open / close execution mode is terminated. The details of the processing during the round will be described later.

If the round game is not in progress, step S1107 determines whether or not the round end timing is reached. For example, immediately after step S619 in FIG. 18, a process for setting a round end command indicating the end of the round game is provided, and in this step, it is confirmed whether or not it is the reception timing of the round end command to end the round. It is possible to determine whether or not it is the timing. The close command may be used as a substitute for the round end command. If it is the round end timing, the round end process is executed in step S1108, and then the open / close execution mode effect process is ended. The details of the round end processing will be described later.

If it is not the round end timing, it is determined in step S1109 whether or not the waiting period (round interval) between rounds is in progress. If it is in the waiting period, the waiting period processing is executed in step S1110, and then the opening / closing execution mode effect processing is terminated. The details of the waiting period processing will be described later.

If it is not in the standby period, it is determined in step S1111 whether or not the ending command is received as the transmission command from the main control device 81. When the ending command is received, the process proceeds to step S1112, and various devices are controlled so that the ending effect is executed. After the execution of step S1112 or when a negative determination is made in step S1111, the opening / closing execution mode effect processing is terminated.

Next, the process for the waiting period in step S1110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the waiting period processing, first, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not the waiting period is in the first to 14th rounds. The waiting period of the first round is a waiting period provided immediately after the first round game, in other words, the waiting period between the first round game and the second round game. Is. To determine the number of rounds to wait for, the effect control device 82 independently counts the number of rounds based on receiving the above-mentioned round start command or release command, and determines based on the result. it can. Further, the round start command or the like may include information on which round game the game is in, and the command may be analyzed for determination.

When it is determined that the waiting period is from the first round to the 14th round, it is determined in step S1202 whether or not it is the start timing of the first effect DR1. Here, the first effect DR1 will be described with reference to FIG. 30 (a). The first production DR1 is a production that notifies the task (target) to be achieved by the player in the next round game. In the present embodiment, based on the fact that the maximum number of winnings in each round game in the open / close execution mode is diversified, a V prize is won by winning the maximum number of winnings in the variable winning device 32 in the next round game. The above task is to generate it. In the first production DR1, for example, in addition to the character image 601 imitating a god, a message image 602 displaying characters such as "Let's win a V prize with the maximum number" is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41. Is displayed.

In the present embodiment, the determination of whether or not the waiting period is in the first to 14th rounds and the determination of whether or not it is the start timing of the first production DR1 are performed separately. When the first effect DR1 is started at the start timing of the waiting period, the process of step S1202 may be omitted.

If it is determined in step S1202 that it is the start timing of the first effect DR1, the process proceeds to step S1203, and it is determined whether or not the success flag is stored in the various flag storage areas provided in the RAM 244. The success flag is a flag indicating that the above-mentioned task notified by the first effect DR1 has been achieved.

If the success flag is not stored, the setting process for executing the first effect DR1 is executed in step S1204. In this step, a command including information indicating the display content of the first effect DR1 or information specifying the first effect DR1 is output to the display control device 212. The display control device 212 that has received the command reads the image data for the first effect DR1 from the character ROM 276, and controls the symbol display device 41 so that the image corresponding to the image data is displayed on the display screen G. .. Further, in step S1204, the audio data for the first effect DR1 and the illumination data stored in the ROM 243 are read out, and for example, the sound corresponding to the display content of the message image 602 is output, or the first effect DR1 is output. The speaker unit 64 and the light emitting unit 63 are driven and controlled so that the light emitting effect for the purpose is performed.

If it is determined in step S1201 that the waiting period is not the first to 14th rounds, that is, the waiting period is the 15th round, the process proceeds to step S1205, and the normal waiting period different from that of the first effect DR1 A command is output to the display control device 212, and the speaker unit 64 and the light emitting unit 63 are driven and controlled so that the effect is executed. Further, even when it is determined in step S1203 that the success flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S1205 to execute the process of setting the normal waiting period effect. It should be noted that, unlike the first production DR1, the above-mentioned problem is not notified in the normal standby period production.

After the execution of step S1204 or step S1205, or when it is determined in step S1202 that it is not the start timing of the first effect DR1, the waiting period processing is terminated.

Next, the round start process of step S1104 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 27.

In the round start process, first, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not the round game to be started is the first round game or the last round game in the opening / closing execution mode. If it is determined that the game is the first round game or the final round game, the normal round effect setting process is executed in step S1302. In step S1302, a command is output to the display control device 212 and the speaker unit 64 and the light emitting unit 63 are driven and controlled so that the normal round effect is executed.

If it is determined in step S1301 that the game is not the first round game or the final round game, the process of grasping the maximum number of winning round games to be started is executed in step S1303. The method of grasping the upper limit winning number is not particularly limited, but for example, the same table information as the upper limit number distribution table of FIG. 21 is stored in ROM 243, and the table information and the main control device 81 transmit the table information. The maximum number of winnings can be grasped based on the type command (command indicating the sorted jackpot type) and the result of grasping the round game of which round. Further, when the above-mentioned round start command is transmitted, the command may include information indicating the maximum number of winnings, or a dedicated command indicating the maximum number of winnings at the start of the round game or the open / close execution mode may be included in the main control device 81. May be configured to be transmitted by. In this step, the grasped information on the maximum number of winnings is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 244.

In the following step S1304, it is determined whether or not the success flag is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 244. If the success flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S1305, and the first effect DR1 is set to be continuously executed. That is, various devices are controlled so that the first effect DR1 executed in the immediately preceding standby period is continuously executed even after the start of the round game.

In the first effect DR1 during the round game, as shown in FIG. 30 (a), the round display 600 for notifying the round game in which the round game being executed is the round game is performed. Further, the round display 600 is also performed in the above-mentioned normal round effect.

When the success flag is stored in step S1304, the process of step S1306 is executed. Prior to the description of this process, the process for the round in step S1106 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 28.

In the round middle process, first, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not a winning command has been received from the main control device 81. If the winning command has been received, the process proceeds to step S1402, and the value of the winning counter SPC is added by 1 to update. The winning counter SPC is for the effect control device 82 to grasp the number of winning games balls to the variable winning device 32, and storage areas for storing the value are provided in various counter areas of the RAM 244.

In the following step S1403, it is determined whether or not the success flag is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 244. If the success flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S1404 to determine whether or not a V winning command has been received from the main controller 81, that is, whether or not a V winning command has occurred. When the V winning command is received, in step S1405, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter SPC at that time matches the upper limit winning number grasped in step S1303.

If both values match, the success flag is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 244 in step S1406, and then the setting process for executing the second effect DR2 is executed in step S1407. Here, the second effect DR2 will be described with reference to FIG. 30 (b). The second effect DR2 is an effect that notifies that the task presented in the first effect DR1 has been achieved. In the second production DR2, a message image 603 displaying characters such as "Let's give a reward" is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41 together with the character image 601 imitating God. ..

In step S1407, a command including information indicating the display content of the second effect DR2 or information specifying the second effect DR2 is output to the display control device 212. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 212 reads the image data for the second effect DR2 from the character ROM 276, and controls the symbol display device 41 so that the image corresponding to the image data is displayed on the display screen G. .. Further, in step S1407, the audio data for the second effect DR2 and the illumination data stored in the ROM 243 are read out, and for example, the sound corresponding to the display content of the message image 603 is output, or the second effect DR2 The speaker unit 64 and the light emitting unit 63 are driven and controlled so that the light emitting effect for the purpose is performed.

After executing step S1407, if a negative judgment is made in step S1401 (when a winning command is not received), a positive judgment is made in step S1403 (when a success flag is stored), or a negative judgment is made in step S1404 (when a negative judgment is made in step S1404). When the V winning command is not received) or when a negative determination is made in step S1405 (when the value of the winning counter SPC and the upper limit winning number do not match), the round middle processing is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the round start process (FIG. 27), when it is determined in step S1304 that the success flag is stored, the success round effect is performed as the effect during the round in the round game to be started in step S1306. Set DR4. The success round effect DR4 is implemented in the next round game when the task presented in the first effect DR1 is achieved. In the successful round effect DR4, as shown in FIG. 30D, a specific image 604 that notifies the maximum number of winnings in the round game is displayed. In the specific image 604, in addition to the upper limit number image 604a showing the upper limit winning number, the winning number image 604b showing the winning number to the variable winning device 32 at that time is displayed.

In step S1306, a command including information indicating the display content of the success round effect DR4 or information specifying the second effect DR2 is output to the display control device 212. The display control device 212 that has received the command reads the image data for the effect DR4 from the character ROM 276, and controls the symbol display device 41 so that the image corresponding to the image data is displayed on the display screen G. Further, in step S1306, the speaker unit 64 and the light emitting unit 63 are read out from the sound data and the illumination data for the effect DR4 stored in the ROM 243, and the sound effect and the light emitting effect for the effect DR4 are performed. Drive control.

After the execution of step S1306, step S1302 or step S1305, the round start process ends.

Next, the round end process of step S1108 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the round end process, first, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not the success flag is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 244. Since the round end process is executed at the end of the round game, this step determines whether or not the round game ends without the task being achieved. In addition, when the task is not achieved, it corresponds to the case where the V prize is generated by the prize different from the maximum number of prizes, or the case where the V prize is not generated during the round game.

If the success flag is not stored (when the task is not achieved), the process proceeds to step S1502, and the setting process for executing the third effect DR3 is executed. Here, the third effect DR3 will be described with reference to FIG. 30 (c). The third effect DR3 is an effect that notifies that the challenge to the task presented in the first effect DR1 has failed. In the third effect DR3, a message image 606 in which characters such as "Return!" Is displayed is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41 together with the character image 605 with an angry expression.

In step S1502, a command including information indicating the display content of the third effect DR3 or information specifying the third effect DR3 is output to the display control device 212. The display control device 212 that has received the command reads the image data for the third effect DR3 from the character ROM 276, and controls the symbol display device 41 so that the image corresponding to the image data is displayed on the display screen G. .. Further, in step S1502, the audio data for the third effect DR3 and the illumination data stored in the ROM 243 are read out, and for example, the sound corresponding to the display content of the message image 606 is output, or the third effect DR3 is output. The speaker unit 64 and the light emitting unit 63 are driven and controlled so that the light emitting effect for the purpose is performed.

After the execution of step S1502, the process proceeds to step S1503, and "0" is set to the value of the winning counter SPC provided in various counter areas of the RAM 244. In the following step S1504, the information on the maximum number of winnings stored in the RAM 244 is erased in step S1303 of the round start process (FIG. 27), and then the round end process is terminated.

Further, when the affirmative determination is made in step S1501 (when the success flag is stored), it is determined whether or not the final round game is the final round game. In the case of the final round game, the process proceeds to step S1506, and the success flags stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 244 are deleted. That is, since the success flag is continuously stored until the final round game, if the task is achieved in any of the round games in the open / close execution mode, not only the next round game but also the subsequent round games The maximum number of winnings will be continuously notified. Although not shown, the round does not continue when the maximum number of winnings is notified, and even if the open / close execution mode ends in the middle, the final round game ends at the end timing. Clear the success flag.

After the execution of step S1506 or when a negative determination is made in step S1505 (when it is not the final round game), the process proceeds to step S1503 and the process of setting the value of the winning counter SPC to "0" is executed.

<About the flow of game production in the open / close execution mode>
Next, the flow of the game effect in the open / close execution mode will be described with reference to FIG. 31. Here, it is assumed that the first effect DR1 is started at the start of the waiting period between rounds.

When the waiting period of the first round is started at the timing t1, the first effect DR1 is executed. In the first production DR1, for example, a message image 602 displaying characters such as "Let's make a V prize with the maximum number" is displayed, and the player is awarded the maximum number of prizes in the second round game. Is notified that a V prize should be generated.

As described in the first embodiment, since it is difficult or impossible for the player to determine the maximum number of winnings in the second round game, the player can determine the maximum number of winnings in the second round game. The game will be played by predicting the maximum number of winnings.

For example, in the second round game, if the maximum number of winnings predicted by the player is less than the actual maximum number of winnings and V winning occurs with less than the maximum number of winnings, the round game The third effect DR3 is executed at the timing t2, which is the end timing (in other words, the timing at which the V prize is generated). In the third production DR3, for example, a message image 606 in which characters such as "Come back!" Is displayed is displayed, and the failure of the challenge is notified. After the third production DR3 is performed for a predetermined period, the first production DR1 is executed again, and it is notified that the V prize should be generated by winning the maximum number of prizes in the third round game.

For example, in the third round game, if the maximum number of winnings predicted by the player matches the actual maximum number of winnings, and a V prize is generated in the winning number of the maximum winnings, the round game ends. The second effect DR2 is executed at the timing (timing t3). In the second production DR2, for example, a message image 603 in which characters such as "Let's give a reward" is displayed, and the success of the challenge is notified.

After that, the effect DR4 for the success round is executed at the start timing (timing t4) of the round game of the fourth round. In the successful round effect DR4, a specific image 604 that notifies the maximum number of winnings in the round game is displayed. The specific image 604 is continuously displayed until the round game is completed. Further, the effect DR4 for the successful round is also executed in the next round game, and the specific image 604 that notifies the maximum number of winnings in the round game is displayed. That is, once the challenge is successful, the maximum number of winnings in each round game is notified in the subsequent round games. Therefore, the player can know the maximum number of winnings in each round game by looking at the specific image 604, and can advance the game advantageously as compared with the case where the challenge fails and the specific image 604 is not displayed. Become.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

Under the configuration in which the maximum number of winnings in each round game is diversified, the maximum number of winnings is notified by satisfying a predetermined condition (achievement of a task). When such notification is given, the player can advance the game more advantageously than the case where the player has no choice but to predict the maximum number of winnings and play the game. Therefore, it is possible to add fun to play with the aim of satisfying a predetermined condition, and it is possible to suitably suppress the monotonousness of the game in the open / close execution mode.

The configuration is such that the above predetermined conditions can be satisfied during the open / close execution mode. According to this configuration, not only a game in which a game ball is won by the variable winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode to obtain a prize ball, but also a game in which a predetermined condition is satisfied and notification is executed in the opening / closing execution mode is given. be able to. As a result, it becomes possible to more preferably excite the game in the open / close execution mode.

The above predetermined condition is satisfied based on the game ball passing through the specific area (detection area of the V winning sensor 507) provided in the variable winning device 32. In this case, the predetermined condition can be satisfied while the game ball is won by the variable winning device 32, and the game in the open / close execution mode and the game in which the predetermined condition is satisfied can be suitably compatible with each other. As a result, for example, when trying to satisfy the predetermined conditions, the probability of winning the variable winning device 32 decreases, and the predetermined conditions are set during the execution of each round game while suppressing the game in the open / close execution mode from being impaired. It becomes possible to add a game to be established.

The above-mentioned predetermined condition is satisfied when the winning ball of the upper limit winning number passes through the specific area. Since the maximum number of winnings in each round game is diversified, it is not easy to pass the game ball to a specific area by winning the maximum number of winnings, and it is possible to increase the difficulty of satisfying a predetermined condition. For example, if the difficulty of satisfying a predetermined condition is low and the notification is easy to carry out, the significance of diversifying the maximum number of winnings and letting the player predict it may be lost. In this respect, in the present embodiment, since the difficulty level is increased, the situation where the notification is not achieved occurs with a certain frequency, and the configuration in which the maximum number of winnings is diversified and the configuration in which the maximum number of winnings is notified are notified. Can be suitably harmonized with.

The maximum number of winnings is notified during the open / close execution mode. While the maximum number of winnings for each round game is diversifying, the maximum number of winnings for each round game is notified in real time, so that it is possible to provide useful notifications for the player and to increase the degree of interest in the notifications. It will be possible to increase.

In that case, the maximum number of winning prizes is notified using the waiting period between rounds. Since the variable winning device 32 is closed during the waiting period, the notification can be viewed without being distracted by whether or not the game ball wins the variable winning device 32. Therefore, it is possible to preferably suppress the oversight of the notification of the maximum number of winnings, and to make it easy for the player to grasp the maximum number of winnings of each round game through the notification.

When a predetermined condition is satisfied in any of the round games in the open / close execution mode, the maximum number of winnings is notified for the round games for a plurality of rounds executed after the round game. In this case, the earlier the predetermined condition is satisfied in the open / close execution mode, the more the maximum number of winnings can be known for the round game. As a result, it is possible to give the enjoyment of playing a game aiming at satisfying a predetermined condition as soon as possible, and it is possible to preferably suppress the monotonization of the game in the opening / closing execution mode.

In the present embodiment, the maximum number of winnings is notified from the next round game of the round game in which the predetermined condition is satisfied, but whether the maximum number of winnings in the round game in which the predetermined condition is satisfied is several. In order to notify, the maximum number of winnings may be notified for the round games after the round in which the predetermined conditions are satisfied.

As described in the first embodiment, the display of the stop result (stop result A to stop result C) of the special figure on the special figure display unit 43 is specified so that the player can recognize the upper limit winning number. It also functions as a notification. In that sense, the present embodiment is based on the first specific notification based on the stop result displayed on the special figure display unit 43 and the success round effect DR4 (specific image 604) displayed on the display screen G. It can be said that both the second specific notification (notification that the player can easily recognize the upper limit winning number than the first specific notification) is performed.

<Third embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the variable winning device 32 is different from each of the above-described embodiments. The present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 45. In these figures, the same components as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a passage structure of the variable winning device 32 according to the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, the configuration of the passage portion provided behind the right entrance portion 504 is different from that of the first embodiment. Since the other configurations related to the variable winning device 32 are the same as those in the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 32, a right vertical passage portion 701 extending in the vertical direction is provided behind the right entrance portion 504. The right vertical passage portion 701 communicates with the passage portion 502 (FIG. 7 (a)), and among the game balls that have flowed into the large winning opening 32a (FIG. 6 (b)), the game ball that has entered the right entrance portion 504. To guide downwards. A winning sensor 702 that detects a game ball that has entered the right entrance portion 504 is arranged at an intermediate position of the right vertical passage portion 701. Similar to the winning sensor 509 according to the first embodiment, the winning sensor 702 detects only whether or not a game ball has won a prize in the large winning opening 32a.

The fall winning sensor 703 is arranged on the downstream side of the winning sensor 702 in the right vertical passage portion 701. The details will be described later, but in the present embodiment, the lottery mode shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode based on the game ball winning the large winning opening 32a passing through the fall winning sensor 703. ing. That is, the fall winning sensor 703 or its arrangement area is a specific area that triggers a fall from the high probability mode to the low probability mode.

A branch passage portion 704 branching from the right vertical passage portion 701 is provided in the intermediate portion between the winning sensor 702 and the falling winning sensor 703 in the right vertical passage portion 701. A V winning sensor 705 is arranged at an intermediate position of the branch passage portion 704. Also in the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the following is provided on the condition that the game ball passes through the V winning sensor 705 during the execution of one round game (generation of V winning). The structure is such that a round game is executed. Note that, unlike the V winning sensor 705 according to the first embodiment, the V winning sensor 705 does not play a role of detecting whether or not a game ball has won a prize in the large winning opening 32a, and only the occurrence of a V winning. Is to be detected.

The winning sensor 702, the falling winning sensor 703, and the V winning sensor 705 are electrically connected to the main control device 81, and are predetermined when the game ball passes through the detection areas of the winning sensors 702, 703, and 705. The detection information (detection signal) is input to the main control device 81. Based on this detection information, the main control device 81 determines whether or not the game ball has passed each winning sensor 702, 703, 705. When the passage of the game ball to the prize sensor 702 is grasped by the main control device 81, the prize ball is paid out, but the passage of the game ball to the fall prize sensor 703 or the V prize sensor 705 is grasped. However, prize balls will not be paid out. Further, in the following, the arrangement area of the fall winning sensor 703 or the detection area thereof may be referred to as a fall area 703a.

The width of each passage of the right vertical passage portion 701 and the branch passage portion 704 is larger than the diameter of the game ball and smaller than twice the diameter dimension of the game ball, and each of these passage portions 701 and 704 is 1. It is a ball passage of the article. Further, the game ball that has flowed down each of these passage portions 701 and 704 and has passed through each of the winning sensors 702, 703 and 705 is guided to the discharge passage board 88 (FIG. 3) and discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. ..

A shutter 706 is arranged above the fall prize sensor 703 so as to cover the fall prize sensor 703 from above. The shutter 706 is held in a state in which the right vertical passage portion 701 can be slid and moved in the passage width direction (specifically, the front-rear direction). That is, the shutter 706 has a protruding position (advanced position) that protrudes into the right vertical passage portion 701 and a retracted position (retracted position) that retracts backward from the protruding position and suppresses the amount of protrusion into the right vertical passage portion 701. ) And can be displaced.

As shown in FIG. 32 (a), when the shutter 706 is arranged at the protruding position, the shutter 706 blocks the flow path to the fall region 703a. As a result, the fall area 703a is closed, and the game ball that has entered the right entrance portion 504 cannot pass through the fall winning sensor 703. The game ball whose inflow to the fall region 703a is restricted by the shutter 706 comes into contact with the upper surface portion 706a of the shutter 706, is guided to the branch passage portion 704, and passes through the V winning sensor 705.

The upper surface portion 706a of the shutter 706 is an inclined surface that descends to the branch passage portion 704 side, whereby the game ball is satisfactorily guided to the branch passage portion 704. The height position of the shutter 706 is a height position that does not obstruct the flow of the game ball to the branch passage portion 704 in the state where the shutter 706 is arranged at the protruding position. Specifically, the upper surface is a step to which the game ball is caught. It is set at a height position that is not formed between the portion 706a and the branch passage portion 704. In the present embodiment, the upper surface portion 706a is tilted at substantially the same inclination angle as the branch passage portion 704, and the upper surface portion 706a and the branch passage portion 704 are set at a height position where a substantially linear spherical passage is formed. There is.

As shown in FIG. 32 (b), when the shutter 706 is arranged at the retracted position, the shutter 706 retracts from above the fall area 703a, and the area 703a is opened upward. As a result, the fall area 703a is opened, and the game ball that has entered the right entrance portion 504 can pass through the fall winning sensor 703.

In the present embodiment, when the fall area 703a is in the closed state, the game ball cannot pass through the fall winning sensor 703, but it may be possible to pass the game ball in a range that is harder to pass than in the open state. The point is that the passability of the fall winning sensor 703 may differ between the open state and the closed state, and the degree of closing or opening is arbitrary.

The front region of the passage structure is a light transmission region, and the game ball flowing through the passage structure can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The entire passage structure does not necessarily have to be visible, and at least the shutter 706 (the distribution status of the game ball) and the V winning sensor 705 (whether or not the game ball has passed the detection area of the V winning sensor 705). It suffices if and is visible.

The variable winning device 32 is provided with a shutter drive unit 707 that drives the shutter 706. The drive unit 707 has a solenoid as a drive source and a link mechanism as a drive force transmission means for transmitting the drive force of the solenoid to the shutter 706. The solenoid is electrically connected to the main control device 81 and is driven based on a drive signal from the main control device 81. When the solenoid is driven, the shutter 706 retracts from the protruding position to the retracted position, and the fall area 703a switches from the closed state to the open state. When the output of the drive signal from the main control device 81 is stopped, the shutter 706 is advanced from the retracted position to the protruding position by the urging force of the urging means (spring or the like), and the fall area 703a is switched from the open state to the closed state.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, the timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 33. This process is executed in place of the timer interrupt process of FIG. In FIG. 33, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as those in FIG. 13, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

After executing the V winning process in step S106, the falling winning process is executed in step S1601. After executing the fall prize processing, the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Here, the fall prize processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 34. In the fall winning process, first, in step S1701, it is determined whether or not the fall flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. If the fall flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S1702, and whether the fall prize has occurred based on the detection state of the fall prize sensor 703 provided in the variable winning device 32 (reading result of various sensors in step S101). Whether or not (whether or not the game ball has passed through the detection area of the fall winning sensor 703) is determined.

When it is determined that the fall prize has occurred, it is determined in step S1703 whether or not the fall prize is valid. The valid period is a predetermined period that is predetermined in anticipation of a period in which a fall prize can be normally generated. For example, the opening period of the shutter 706 is set as the valid period. If it is determined that the period is not valid, the process proceeds to step S1704, an error command is set assuming that an abnormality has occurred, and then the fall prize processing is terminated. The set error command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process of the normal process (FIG. 14), and the effect control device 82 emits light from the display control device 212 so that a predetermined error notification is executed. The unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 are controlled.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the valid period is in effect, the process proceeds to step S1705, and the fall flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. In the following step S1706, a fall winning command is set as a transmission target to the effect control device 82. The fall prize command is a command for notifying the effect control device 82 that a fall prize has occurred, and the set fall prize command is sent to the effect control device 82 by the external output process of the normal process (FIG. 14). Will be sent. By receiving the fall prize command, the effect control device 82 grasps that the fall prize has occurred. After the execution of step S1706, if an affirmative judgment is made in step S1701 (when the fall flag is stored) or a negative judgment is made in step S1702 (when a fall prize has not occurred), the fall prize processing is terminated. To do.

<Normal processing>
Next, the normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is executed in place of the normal process of FIG. In FIG. 35, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as those in FIG. 14, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

After executing the electric service support process in step S205, the shutter drive process for driving and controlling the shutter 706 is executed in step S1801. The details of the shutter drive process will be described later. After the execution of step S1801, the process proceeds to step S206 to execute the game ball launch control process for controlling the launch of the game ball.

<Opening and closing of the winning opening>
Next, the large winning opening opening / closing process in step S510 (FIG. 17) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is executed in place of the large winning opening opening / closing process of FIG.

In the large winning opening opening / closing process, first, in step S1901, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "0". If the value of the round counter RC is not "0", it is determined in step S1902 whether or not the round game is being executed. The determination as to whether or not the round game is being executed is performed by determining whether or not the round flag described later is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114.

If the round game is not being executed, the process proceeds to step S1903, and it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter T is “0”. If the value of the timer counter T is "0", the process proceeds to step S1904. In step S1904, a setting process for each round is executed to set the maximum number of winnings to the variable winning device 32 and the number of times the variable winning device 32 is opened in each round game in the open / close execution mode.

Here, the setting process for each round will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 37. In this setting process, first, in step S2101, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "16". That is, it is determined whether or not the round game to be set is the first round game in the open / close execution mode. If the value of the round counter RC is not "16", that is, the round game to be set is the second and subsequent round games, the continuation stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 in step S2102. Clear the flag. The continuation flag is the same as the continuation flag according to the first embodiment.

After the execution of step S2102 or when an affirmative determination is made in step S2101 (when the value of the round counter RC is "16"), in step S2103, the jackpot type flag stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 is set. Based on this, grasp the jackpot type corresponding to the open / close execution mode being executed or being executed. For example, when the 16R jackpot A flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e, the 16R jackpot result A is grasped as the jackpot type corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode. Further, in this step, based on the value of the round counter RC, it is grasped which round game the round game to be set (the round game to be started from now on) is the round game.

In the following step S2104, the upper limit number distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 113b of the ROM 113 is referred to, and the upper limit number of winnings to the variable winning device 32 in the round game to be set is set.

Here, the upper limit number distribution table will be described with reference to FIG. 38 (a). In the maximum number distribution table, the maximum number of winnings for each round game is specified for each jackpot type. The maximum number of winnings for each round game corresponding to the 16R jackpot result A is set to 8 for each round game, and is unified among the rounds. The maximum number of winnings for each round game corresponding to the 16R jackpot result B is 8 for each round game up to the 10th round, as in the case of the 16R jackpot result A, but any of the 11th round and thereafter. There is also one round game. The maximum number of winnings for each round game corresponding to the 16R jackpot result C is 8 for each round game up to the 5th round, but 1 for each round game after the 6th round. ..

The specific maximum number of winning prizes shown in FIG. 38 is only an example, and is not limited to these numbers. For example, the maximum number of winnings may be 10 for a round game in which the maximum number of winnings is 8, and the maximum number of winnings may be 2 for a round game in which the maximum number of winnings is 1.

Returning to the explanation of the setting process (FIG. 37) for each round, in step S2104, the result of grasping the jackpot type in the step S2103 and the round game to be set is the round game, and the upper limit number swing. Based on the minute table, the corresponding maximum number of winnings is derived. In the following step S2105, a value corresponding to the above-derived upper limit winning number is set as the value of the winning counter PC provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114. For example, when the jackpot type is 16R jackpot result C, the round game to be set is the sixth round game, and the derived upper limit winning number is 1, the value of the winning counter PC is "1". "Is set.

In the following step S2106, the number of times the variable winning device 32 is opened in the round game to be set is set with reference to the opening / closing pattern table stored in the distribution table storage area 113b of the ROM 113.

Here, the opening / closing pattern table will be described with reference to FIG. 38 (b). In the opening / closing pattern table, the number of times the variable winning device 32 is opened in each round game is defined for each jackpot type. The number of times each round game corresponding to the 16R jackpot result A is opened is 8 times for each round game, and is unified among the rounds. The number of times each round game corresponding to the 16R jackpot result B is open is 8 times for each round game up to the 10th round, as in the case of the 16R jackpot result A, but after the 11th round, any round. The game is also said to be once. The number of times each round game corresponding to the 16R jackpot result C is open is 8 times for each round game up to the 5th round, but 1 time for each round game after the 6th round.

The process of setting the opening period of each opening will be described later, but in the present embodiment, the opening period is set to 1 sec in each opening. That is, the opening period (opening mode) of each opening is the same when the variable winning device 32 is opened eight times in one round game and when the variable winning device 32 is opened once in one round game. There is. Therefore, when the variable winning device 32 is opened eight times, the player determines whether it is due to the round game for eight rounds or the round game for one round. It is difficult to distinguish or it is difficult to distinguish by looking at it. Therefore, the player predicts the round number of the current round game during the execution of the open / close execution mode and plays the game.

In the present embodiment, in order to make the above characteristics function more effectively, in the open / close execution mode, the round game being executed or started is not notified as to which round game the round game is.

Comparing the opening / closing pattern table shown in FIG. 38 (b) with the upper limit number distribution table shown in FIG. 38 (a), the number of times each round game is opened and the maximum number of winnings in each round game are the same. This is based on the assumption that one game ball wins the variable winning device 32 by opening for 1 second, and the number of opening times is set according to the maximum number of winnings. The number of times each round game is opened is not limited to the number shown in FIG. 38 (b), and can be arbitrarily set as in the upper limit number distribution table.

Returning to the description of the setting process (FIG. 37) for each round, in step S2106, the result of grasping the jackpot type in the step S2103 and the round game to be set is the round game, and the opening / closing pattern table. Based on the above, the corresponding number of times of opening is derived. In the following step S2107, a value corresponding to the number of times of opening derived is set as the value of the opening counter OC provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114. For example, when the jackpot type is 16R jackpot result C, the round game to be set is the sixth round game, and the derived number of times of opening is one, the value of the opening counter OC is "1". To set.

In the following step S2108, the round flags are stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114, and then the setting process for each round ends. The round flag is a flag indicating that a round game is being executed.

Returning to the description of the large winning opening opening / closing process (FIG. 36), after executing the setting process for each round in step S1904, the process proceeds to step S1905 to set the opening period of the variable winning device 32. Specifically, the value of the timer counter T is set to "500", which corresponds to the opening period (1 sec) for one opening.

In the following step S1906, a large winning opening opening process for switching the variable winning device 32 from the closed state to the open state is executed, and then in step S1907, an opening command is set as a transmission command to the effect control device 82. After executing step S1907, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1901 (when the value of the round counter RC is "0") or a negative determination is made in step S1903 (when the value of the timer counter T is not "0"). , Finish the opening and closing process of the big winning opening.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1902 (when the round game is being executed), the process proceeds to step S1908 to determine whether or not the large winning opening 32a is open (the variable winning device 32 is open). .. If the large winning opening 32a is being opened, the opening processing is executed in step S1909, and then the large winning opening opening / closing process is terminated. The opening process is a process of determining whether or not the variable winning device 32 has won a prize, and controlling the timing of switching the variable winning device 32 to the closed state.

Here, the processing for opening will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 39. In the opening process, first, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter T is "0". This process determines whether or not the opening period set in step S1905 (FIG. 36) has elapsed. When the value of the timer counter T is "0" (when the opening period has elapsed), the process proceeds to step S2202, and the value of the opening counter OC is decremented and updated by one.

On the other hand, when the value of the timer counter T is not "0" (when the opening period has not elapsed), the detection state of the winning sensors 509 and 702 (reading results of various sensors in step S101) is set in step S2203. Based on this, it is determined whether or not a prize has been generated in the variable winning device 32. When a prize is generated in the variable winning device 32, the process proceeds to step S2204, and the value of the winning counter PC provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is decremented by one.

After the execution of step S2204 or when a negative determination is made in step S2203 (when the variable winning device 32 has not been won), the V winning flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 in step S2205. Judge whether or not. The V-winning flag is a flag indicating that the game ball has passed through the detection area of the V-winning sensor 705, that is, a V-winning has occurred.

If the V winning flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S2206, the V winning flag stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 is deleted, and the continuation flag is set in the various flag storage areas 114e. The continuation flag is a flag indicating that the next round game should be executed, in other words, the open / close execution mode should be continued even after the running round game is completed.

After the execution of step S2206 or when a negative determination is made in step S2205 (when the V winning flag is not stored), it is determined in step S2207 whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is "0". When it is determined that the value of the winning counter PC is not "0", that is, when the number of winnings to the variable winning device 32 has not reached the upper limit winning number, the opening processing is terminated.

In the first embodiment described above, when it is determined that the V winning flag is stored, the value of the winning counter PC is set to "0" (step S612 in FIG. 18), but in the present embodiment , It is not supposed to do this. That is, in the present embodiment, regardless of whether or not V winning occurs during the round game, the upper limit of the number of winnings to the variable winning device 32 is reached or the opening period of the variable winning device 32 is opened. The round game is continued until the period (the product of the number of openings and the opening period of each opening) is reached.

If an affirmative judgment is made in step S2207 (when the value of the winning counter PC is "0"), the value of the open counter OC is set to "0" in step S2208. After executing step S2208 or step S2202 (update processing of the opening counter OC), in step S2209, a large winning opening closing process for switching the variable winning device 32 from the open state to the closed state is executed. In the following step S2210, it is determined whether or not the value of the open counter OC is "0". If the value of the open counter OC is not "0", the value of the timer counter T is set to "1000" (1 sec) in step S2211. In this process, a waiting period between each opening during the round game (a period in which the variable winning device 32 is closed and the next opening is waited for) is set.

After the execution of step S2211 or when an affirmative judgment is made in step S2210 (when the value of the open counter OC is "0"), a close command is set as a transmission command to the effect control device 82, and then the open command is used. End the process.

Returning to the explanation of the large winning opening opening / closing process (FIG. 36), if a negative judgment is made in step S1908 (when the large winning opening 32a is not open), the process proceeds to step S1910, and the value of the opening counter OC is "0". Determine if it exists. If the value of the open counter OC is "0", the round update or ending start process is executed in step S1911.

Here, the round update process or the ending start process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 40. In this process, first, in step S2401, it is determined whether or not the continuation flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. When the continuation flag is stored, the value of the round counter RC is decremented by 1 in step S2402, and the number of rounds in the open / close execution mode is updated.

In the following step S2403, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter RC is “0”. If the value of the round counter RC is not "0", that is, if there are remaining round games, the process proceeds to step S2404, and the value of the timer counter T is set to "1000" corresponding to the waiting period (2 sec) between rounds. Set to.

Here, in the present embodiment, the waiting period between the round games is set to the same length as the waiting period between each opening during the round game. Therefore, when the variable winning device 32 is in the closed state in the open / close execution mode, it is determined whether it is due to the waiting period between rounds or the waiting period between each opening during the round game. It becomes indistinguishable or difficult to discriminate from the viewpoint of the player. As a result, the boundary between rounds is not known or is difficult to understand, so that the characteristic of playing by predicting which round game the current round game is during execution of the open / close execution mode is more preferably exhibited. be able to.

In this case, the same game effect is performed during the waiting period between rounds and the waiting period between each opening (specifically, the display image such as the background image displayed on the display screen G is the same image, or the light emitting unit. The light emitting mode of 63 and the output sound from the speaker unit 64 may be the same mode). This makes it even more difficult to determine whether it is the waiting period between rounds or the waiting period between each opening during the round game.

In the following step S2405, a round update command is set as a transmission command to the effect control device 82. The effect control device 82 grasps that the next round game is started by receiving the round update command. Next, in step S2406, the round flags stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 are erased, and then the round update or ending start processing is terminated.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2403 (when the value of the round counter RC is "0"), the process proceeds to step S2407 and the ending start processing is executed. In the start process, an ending waiting period for waiting without starting the next game round for the ending of the open / close execution mode is set. Specifically, the timer counter T is set with the waiting period information for the ending stored in advance in the ROM 113. After that, in step S2408, the ending command is set, and the round update or ending start processing is ended.

If a negative determination is made in step S2401 (when the continuation flag is not stored), the process proceeds to step S2409, and the value of the round counter RC is set to "0" in order to end the open / close execution mode. After that, the process proceeds to step S2407, the ending start processing and the ending command setting processing (step S2408) are executed, and the round update or ending start processing is completed.

Returning to the explanation of the large winning opening opening / closing process (FIG. 36), when a negative determination is made in step S1910 (when the value of the opening counter OC is not "0"), it means that the remaining opening exists in the round game. In this case, the process proceeds to step S1912, and it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter T is “0”. This process determines whether or not the waiting period between each opening set in step S2211 (FIG. 39) has elapsed.

When the value of the timer counter T is "0" (when the waiting period between each opening has elapsed), the process proceeds to step S1905 to set the opening period for the next opening. On the other hand, when the value of the timer counter T is not "0" (when the waiting period between each opening has not elapsed), the round update or ending start processing is terminated as it is.

<Shutter drive processing>
Next, the shutter driving process in step S1801 (FIG. 35) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 41 (a).

In the shutter driving process, first, in step S2501, it is determined whether or not the shutter 706 (FIG. 32) is being opened, that is, whether or not the shutter 706 is arranged at the retracted position. When the shutter 706 is not opened and the fall area 703a (FIG. 32) is closed, the process proceeds to step S2502, and the variable winning device 32 is entered in the final round game (16th round). It is determined whether or not the maximum number of winnings has been won. In the present embodiment, the shutter 706 (falling area 703a) is opened at the timing when the game ball, which is the upper limit winning number in the final round game, passes through either the winning sensor 509 or the winning sensor 702. In this step, it is determined whether or not it is the opening timing of the shutter 706.

When the maximum number of winnings in the final round game is won, the opening period of the shutter 706 is set in step S2503. Specifically, the value of the timer counter T2 provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is set to "1000" (1 sec). As shown in FIG. 41 (b), the opening period (period t1 to timing t2) of the shutter 706 is set to be shorter than the ending period (period t1 to timing t3).

In the following step S2504, the drive unit 707 is brought into the drive state in order to open the shutter 706 (to displace the shutter 706 from the protruding position to the retracted position). After that, the shutter drive process is completed.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2501 (when the shutter 706 is being opened), the process proceeds to step S2505 to determine whether or not the value of the timer counter T2 is "0". This process determines whether or not the opening period of the shutter 706 set in step S2503 has elapsed.

When the value of the timer counter T2 is "0" (when the opening period of the shutter 706 has elapsed), in step S2506, in order to close the shutter 706 (to displace the shutter 706 from the retracted position to the protruding position). ), The drive unit 707 is set to the non-drive state. After the execution of step S2506 or when a negative determination is made in step S2505 (when the value of the timer counter T2 is not "0"), the shutter drive process is terminated.

<Transition processing at the end of open / close execution mode>
Next, the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode will be described. FIG. 42A is a flowchart showing a transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode, and FIG. 42B is a schematic diagram of a jackpot type table stored in the distribution table storage area 113b of the ROM 113.

The transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode shown in FIG. 42 (a) is executed in step S513 of the game state transition process (FIG. 17), and replaces the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode of FIG. 22. It is what is executed. In FIG. 42 (a), the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as those in FIG. 22, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

In this transition process, first, in step S2601, it is determined whether or not any of the 16R jackpot flag A, the 16R jackpot flag B, or the 16R jackpot flag C is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. These various jackpot flags are stored in step S410 of the fluctuation start processing (FIG. 16).

Here, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 42 (b), four types of jackpot types are set: 16R jackpot result A, 16R jackpot result B, 16R jackpot result C, and 5R jackpot result D. Among them, 16R jackpot results A to 16R jackpot results C correspond to probabilistic jackpot results, and 5R jackpot results D correspond to normal jackpot results (non-probable variable jackpot results). In the 5R jackpot result D, a round game of 5 rounds is executed, but the opening / closing pattern of the variable winning device 32 in each round game is not particularly limited. For example, the variable winning device 32 may be opened once in the round game and the upper limit opening period may be 30 sec. Similarly to the 16R jackpot result A to 16R jackpot result C, in one round game, the variable winning device 32 may be opened once. The opening period of 1 sec may be repeated a plurality of times (short-term opening mode).

When it is determined in step S2601 that any of the 16R jackpot flags A to 16R jackpot flags C is stored, that is, when the executed open / close execution mode is the open / close execution mode corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result. , Step S2602, and it is determined whether or not the fall flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. The fall flag indicates that the game ball has passed through the fall area 703a (FIG. 32 (b)), and is stored in step S1705 of the fall winning process (FIG. 34).

When the fall flag is not stored (when the game ball has not passed through the fall area 703a), the process proceeds to step S902, and the high probability mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 114e. As a result, the lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode. In the following step S903, the high frequency support mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 114e. As a result, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode.

If it is determined in step S2602 that the fall flag is stored (when the game ball passes through the fall area 703a), the process proceeds to step S904, and the fall flag stored in the various flag storage areas 114e is deleted. At the same time, the high frequency support mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 114e. Next, in step S905, "100" is set in the game count counter GC, and then the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode ends. That is, when the fall flag is stored (when the game ball passes through the fall area 703a during the open / close execution mode), the lottery mode does not shift to the high probability mode even if the probability variation jackpot is won.

Further, even when a negative determination is made in step S2601 (when none of the 16R jackpot flags A to 16R jackpot flag C is stored), the processes of steps S904 and S905 are executed, and then when the open / close execution mode ends. Ends the migration process of.

<About the flow of the game in the open / close execution mode>
Next, the flow of the game in the open / close execution mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 and 43 to 45.

As described above, in the present embodiment, if the V prize is not generated in the running round game, the next round game is not executed, and if the round game ends without the V prize being generated, at that time. The open / close execution mode is configured to end (see FIGS. 38 and 39). If a V prize is generated during the round game, the round game does not end in the middle as in the first embodiment, and the number of prizes in the variable prize device 32 reaches the maximum number of prizes, or The round game is configured so that the round game is performed until any of the end conditions that the opening period of the variable winning device 32 reaches the upper limit opening period is satisfied.

Further, as shown in FIG. 32, a fall winning sensor 703 is provided in the variable winning device 32. When the game ball passes through the fall prize sensor 703 during the open / close execution mode (when a fall prize occurs), the open / close execution mode ends even if the open / close execution mode corresponds to the probability variation jackpot result. After that, the lottery mode does not shift to the high probability mode, but is configured to be the low probability mode.

Further, in the large winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32, there is a right entrance portion 504 in which either a V winning or a falling winning is generated, and a left entrance portion 505 in which the falling winning is not generated but the V winning is not generated. It is provided. A shutter 706 is provided on the upstream side of the fall winning sensor 703 at the right entrance portion 504 to distribute the game ball winning the right entrance portion 504 to the V winning sensor 705 side and the falling winning sensor 703 side. The shutter 706 is driven and controlled by the main control device 81 so as to be displaced to the distribution side to the fall winning sensor 703 at the winning timing of the upper limit winning number in the final round game.

Here, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 45, when the shutter 706 is opened, the passing ball A of the winning sensor 702 (first region) that triggered the opening is the fall region 703a (second region). It is configured to pass through the area). That is, the required period from when the passing sphere A passes through the first region to when it reaches the shutter 706 or the second region is until the passing sphere A passes through the first region and the shutter 706 switches to the retracted position. The passage length (distance) L between the first region and the shutter 706 is set so as to be longer than the period of.

With the above configuration, from the start of the open / close execution mode to the prize one before the maximum number of prizes in the final round game, the game ball is continuously won in the right entrance portion 504 and V in each round game. While the round game is continued by generating a prize, in the winning of the maximum number of winnings in the final round game, the game ball is won in the left entrance portion 505 to avoid the occurrence of the falling prize. , While maximizing the total number of prize balls that can be obtained in the open / close execution mode, it is possible to shift to the high probability mode after the end of the open / close execution mode.

Further, on the upstream side of the variable winning device 32, a game ball launched with a strength less than a predetermined amount is guided to the left entrance portion 505, and a game ball launched with a strength equal to or more than a predetermined amount is guided to the right entrance portion 504. A guide passage portion 401 is provided to guide the vehicle (see FIG. 5). That is, it is possible to select which of the right entrance portion 504 and the left entrance portion 505 is to win the game ball according to the player's intention. Therefore, it is an ideal operation mode for the player to perform the launch operation of the game ball so that the winning switching of each of the entrance portions 504 and 505 described above is realized.

Under such a configuration, in the present embodiment, the player cannot or is difficult to determine which round of the round game is being executed in the open / close execution mode. Specifically, a round game in which the variable winning device 32 is opened a plurality of times and a round game in which the variable winning device 32 is opened once are provided (see FIG. 38), and the variable winning device 32 in each round game is provided. The number of times of opening is diversified. As a result, even if the player counts the number of times the variable winning device 32 is opened, it is difficult or impossible to grasp which round of the round game is being executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the notification (display or voice output) that the player can recognize which round game is played is not executed, and the number of rounds is not specified. For this reason, the player cannot obtain information on the number of rounds by the notification, and it is more difficult to determine the number of rounds.

Further, in the present embodiment, the variable winning device 32 is repeatedly opened for 1 sec during the opening / closing execution mode, and the opening mode of the variable winning device 32 is common among the opening modes. For this reason, it is impossible or difficult to determine which round the player is in from the behavior of the variable winning device 32, and it is even more difficult to determine which round the player is in.

From these things, the player has no choice but to predict which round game the round game being executed in the open / close execution mode is, in other words, at what timing the shutter 706 is released. Based on the prediction result, the right entrance portion 504 and the left entrance portion 505 are aimed at and played separately.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 43 to 45, the relationship between the launch operation mode of the player and the game result will be described. Here, as shown in FIG. 43A, the operation of firing the game ball at the strength at which the game ball wins at the left entrance portion 505 is referred to as the first operation, and the strength at which the game ball wins at the right entrance portion 504 is referred to as the first operation. The operation of firing the game ball is called the second operation. Further, the numbers in the square brackets in FIG. 44 indicate the number of winnings to the variable winning device 32 from the start of the opening / closing execution mode (what number of winnings to the variable winning device 32 counting from the start of the opening / closing execution mode). Is shown.

When the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result A is executed, the upper limit winning number of the variable winning device 32 is set to 8 in all round games (see FIG. 38 (a)). As described above, the shutter 706 that opens and closes the fall winning sensor 703 (fall area 703a) is opened by winning the upper limit winning number in the final round game, so that it is the 128th (8) counting from the start of the opening / closing execution mode. It will be released at the timing when a prize (piece x 16 rounds) occurs. In this case, as shown in FIG. 43 (b), the second operation is performed up to the 127th prize, and the first operation is performed with the 128th prize, so that the opening / closing execution mode is completed and 1920 pieces ( It is possible to shift to the high probability mode after the open / close execution mode while acquiring the total number of prize balls (128 × 15 prize balls).

On the other hand, when the open / close execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result C is executed, in the mode, the maximum number of winnings is set to 8 in the round games of the first to fifth rounds, and the upper limit winnings are made in the remaining round games. The number is set to 1. In this case, the shutter 706 is opened at the timing when the 51st (8 × 5 rounds + 1 × 11 rounds) winning is generated counting from the start of the opening / closing execution mode. In this case, the second operation is performed up to the 50th prize, and the first operation is performed with the 51st prize to complete the open / close execution mode and total 765 (51 x 15 prize balls). While acquiring the number of prize balls, it is possible to shift to the high probability mode after the open / close execution mode.

Here, the opening timing of the shutter 706 when the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result C is executed is when the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result A is executed when viewed from the start of the opening / closing execution mode. Will arrive sooner. Assuming that one game ball wins the variable winning device 32 for each opening of the variable winning device 32, as shown in FIG. 44, the opening timing (timing) of the shutter 706 in the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result C When converted to the open / close execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result A, t1) corresponds to the occurrence timing of the third prize in the round game of the seventh round.

For example, in a situation where the open / close execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result C is actually executed, the player assumes that the 16R jackpot result A is the result, and predicts that the timing t1 is around the 7th round. Suppose. In this case, if the player continues the second operation from the start of the open / close execution mode to the timing t1, the shutter 706 is released at that timing, so that the game ball that has entered the right entrance portion 504 covers the fall area 703a. It will pass. As a result, as shown in FIG. 43 (c), although the opening / closing execution mode can be completed and the total number of prize balls of 765 can be obtained, the lottery mode does not shift to the high probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode, and the low probability mode Will play under.

Further, when the player assumes the opening / closing execution mode of the 16R jackpot result B in the situation where the opening / closing execution mode of the 16R jackpot result C is actually executed, or when the opening / closing execution mode of the 16R jackpot result B is actually executed. Even when the player assumes the opening / closing execution mode of the 16R jackpot result A in the situation where is being executed, the actual round (actual shutter opening timing) and the player's predicted round (predicted shutter opening timing) The game ball that has entered the right entrance portion 504 passes through the fall area 703a. Although detailed description is omitted, the opening / closing execution mode may be punctured in the middle depending on the prediction result of the player, and the total number of prize balls obtained in the opening / closing execution mode may be reduced.

In this way, depending on the difference in the firing operation of the game balls in the open / close execution mode, it is possible to change whether or not to shift to the high probability mode after the open / close execution mode, or to change the total number of prize balls in the open / close execution mode. Therefore, the player can predict the round number of the round game being executed, select how long the second operation will be continued, and enjoy the game, which is similar to the so-called chicken race. be able to. As a result, it is preferably suppressed that the game in the open / close execution mode becomes monotonous, and the game in the mode can be greatly excited.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

A fall area 703a is provided, and the lottery mode becomes a low probability mode when the game ball passes through the area 703a. In this case, if the game ball passes through the fall area 703a, it is disadvantageous for the player, so that the player can enjoy the game ball without passing it through the fall area 703a. Moreover, since a game is realized in which the behavior of the game ball causes the player to shift to a fall state or avoid it, the structure is easier for the player to understand than the structure by internal processing such as a fall lottery. Not only can you do this, but you can also improve the original appeal of the game machine, which you can enjoy watching the behavior of the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game and increase the degree of attention to the game.

A shutter 706 that can switch between an open state that allows the game ball to pass through the fall area 703a and a closed state that does not allow the game ball to pass through the fall area 703a is provided, and the shutter 706 is released from the closed state. The switching control for switching to the open state is executed during the open / close execution mode.

For example, if the game ball can always pass through the fall area 703a, the player may hesitate to make the variable winning device 32 win the game ball, which causes the variable winning device 32 to win a prize. The original game of the open / close execution mode for obtaining a prize ball is impaired. In this respect, in the present embodiment, since the shutter 706 that opens and closes the fall area 703a is provided, a period during which the variable winning device 32 does not pass through the fall area 703a is secured even if the game ball is won. As a result, it is possible to generate a prize in the variable winning device 32 while preventing the game ball from passing through the fall area 703a in consideration of the period of the open state or the timing thereof. That is, it is possible to give a game aiming at preventing the game ball from passing through the fall area 703a while suppressing the original game of the opening / closing execution mode from being impaired.

The configuration includes a first game in which the opening timing of the shutter 706 (falling region 703a) is the first timing, and a second game in which the opening timing is a second timing different from the first timing.

For example, if the opening timing of the shutter 706 is fixed, the player can predict the timing, and as a result, it is only necessary to pay attention to the timing, and the fun of providing the fall area 703a is diminished. There is a risk that it will end up. In this respect, in the present embodiment, games are provided in which the release timing of the shutter 706 is different, and the release timing is diversified. For this reason, it becomes difficult for the player to determine the opening timing of the shutter 706, and it is possible to preferably arouse a feeling of excitement at which timing the fall region 703a is opened. As a result, the effect of the fall area 703a can be suitably exerted, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In that case, in the present embodiment, the first game and the second game are configured by the open / close execution mode. As already mentioned, the element of falling when the game ball passes through the fall area 703a during the open / close execution mode gives a feeling of tension that is not already found in the general open / close execution mode. .. Nevertheless, since the opening timing of the shutter 706 (falling region 703a) is unknown or difficult to understand, a strong feeling of excitement can be incorporated into the game in the opening / closing execution mode. As a result, the game in the open / close execution mode can be made much more interesting than the game in which the open / close execution mode is simply digested, and the interest of the game can be suitably enhanced.

A fall area 703a and a privilege area (detection area of the V winning sensor 705) are arranged on the downstream side of the right entrance portion 504, and the game balls that have entered the right entrance portion 504 are distributed to the above areas by the shutter 706. .. According to this configuration, it is indispensable to let the game ball enter the right entrance portion 504 in order to obtain the privilege, so that the player is prevented from continuously avoiding the right entrance portion 504 and launching the game ball. To. Therefore, the significance of the fall region 703a can be suitably exhibited.

In that case, the above privilege is continued as a round, and the next round game is not executed unless the game ball is passed through the privilege area, and the game in the open / close execution mode is not executed satisfactorily. Therefore, the entry of the game into the right entrance portion 504 is preferably promoted, and it is possible to preferably provide an opportunity to enjoy the game with excitement as to whether or not the game ball passes through the fall area 703a. In addition, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a permanent villa (a state in which the game ball does not pass through the fall area 703a forever and the high probability mode is permanent by keeping the game ball in the left entrance portion 505).

The shutter 706 (falling area 703a) is not switched to the open state in each round game in the open / close execution mode, but is switched to the open state in a predetermined predetermined round (16th round). In this case, it is possible to provide a game to be enjoyed by having the player predict the switching round to the open state and aiming to prevent the game ball from passing through the fall area 703a.

In that case, the number of times the variable winning device 32 is opened per round is diversified, and it is impossible or difficult to determine from the behavior of the variable winning device 32 which round game the round game being executed is. I tried to be. In this case, since it is unpredictable or difficult to predict when the switching round to the open state will arrive, it is possible to preferably arouse the excitement of whether or not the game ball passes through the fall region 703a. ..

When the shutter 706 is released, the passing ball A of the winning sensor 702 (first region) that triggered the opening can pass through the fall region 703a (second region).

Since the fall area 703a is a disadvantageous area for the player, it is assumed that after seeing that the game ball has passed the winning sensor 702, the launch mode of the game ball is adjusted so as not to pass through the fall area 703a. To. If such an act of capture is rampant, the fairness of the game among the players may be impaired. In this respect, in the present embodiment, since the passing ball A itself, which triggered the switching to the open state, passes through the fall area 703a, it is in time to deal with it after seeing that the game ball has passed through the winning sensor 702. However, the above-mentioned capture action can be suitably suppressed. As a result, the fairness of the game is ensured, and as a result, the motivation for the game is aroused, and it becomes possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

In that case, the configuration is such that the game ball is restricted from passing through the fall area 703a without passing through the winning sensor 702. In this case, it is possible to prevent an unexpected game ball from flowing into the fall area 703a. As a result, the occurrence of disturbance is suppressed, and the fairness of the game can be suitably ensured. In addition, since the flow of the game ball to be considered when designing the game machine can be limited, it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden at the time of design.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the variable winning device 32 is different from each of the above-described embodiments. The present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 57. In these figures, the same components as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 46 is a diagram showing a passage structure of the variable winning device 32 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 47 is a front view of the variable winning device 32 in a closed state.

As shown in FIG. 46, a first passage portion 801 extending in the vertical direction is provided behind the right entrance portion 504. The first passage portion 801 communicates with the passage portion 502 (FIG. 7 (a)), and among the game balls that have flowed into the large winning opening 32a (FIG. 6 (b)), the game ball that has entered the right entrance portion 504. To guide downwards. A winning sensor 802 that detects a game ball that has entered the right entrance portion 504 is arranged at an intermediate position of the first passage portion 801. The winning sensor 802 detects only whether or not a game ball has won a prize in the large winning opening 32a, similarly to the winning sensor 509 according to the first embodiment.

A high-accuracy V winning sensor 803 is arranged on the downstream side of the winning sensor 802 in the first passage portion 801. The details will be described later, but in the present embodiment, the lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode based on the game ball winning the large winning opening 32a passing through the high probability V winning sensor 803. .. That is, the high-probability V winning sensor 803 or its arrangement area is a specific area that triggers the transition to the high-probability mode. In the following, the arrangement area of the high-accuracy V winning sensor 803 or the detection area thereof may be referred to as the high-accuracy V area 803a.

A second passage portion 804 branching from the first passage portion 801 is provided in the intermediate portion between the winning sensor 802 and the high-accuracy V winning sensor 803 in the first passage portion 801. A discharge sensor 805 is arranged at an intermediate position of the second passage portion 804. The discharge sensor 805 is for detecting that the game ball that has entered the right entrance portion 504 is discharged to the outside of the variable winning device 32.

On the downstream side of the high-accuracy V winning sensor 803 in the first passage portion 801 is provided a third passage portion 806 that joins the first passage portion 801 with the left vertical passage portion 508. The third passage portion 806 has an inclined shape that descends toward the left vertical passage portion 508, and guides the game ball that has passed through the high-accuracy V winning sensor 803 to the left vertical passage portion 508.

In the left vertical passage portion 508, the continuous V winning sensor 807 is arranged on the downstream side of the confluence portion with the third passage portion 806. The continuous V winning sensor 807 plays the same role as the V winning sensor 705 according to the third embodiment. That is, also in the present embodiment, the next round game is executed on the condition that the game ball passes the continuous V winning sensor 807 during the execution of one round game. In the following, in order to distinguish between the passage of the game ball through the high accuracy V winning sensor 803 and the passage of the game ball through the continuous V winning sensor 807, the former may be referred to as a high accuracy V winning and the latter may be referred to as a continuous V winning. .. The continuous V winning sensor 807 does not play a role of detecting whether or not a game ball has won a prize in the large winning opening 32a, and only detects the occurrence of a continuous V winning. Further, the continuous V winning sensor 807 also plays a role of detecting that the game ball entering the left entrance portion 505 or the right entrance portion 504 is discharged to the outside of the variable winning device 32, similarly to the discharge sensor 805.

The winning sensor 802, the high-accuracy V winning sensor 803, the discharge sensor 805, and the continuous V winning sensor 807 are electrically connected to the main control device 81, and the detection areas of the respective sensors 802,803,805,807 are played. When the ball passes, predetermined detection information (detection signal) is input to the main control device 81. Based on this detection information, the main control device 81 determines whether or not the game ball has passed each sensor 802, 803, 805, 807. When the passage of the game ball to the winning sensor 802 is grasped by the main control device 81, the winning ball is paid out, but the game to the high-accuracy V winning sensor 803, the discharge sensor 805, and the continuous V winning sensor 807. Even if the passage of the ball is known, the prize ball will not be paid out.

The width of each passage of the first passage 801 and the second passage 804 and the third passage 806 is larger than the diameter of the game ball and smaller than twice the diameter of the game ball, and each of these passages Each of 801, 804, and 806 is a single ball passage. Further, the game ball that has passed through the discharge sensor 805 or the continuous V winning sensor 807 is guided to the discharge passage board 88 (FIG. 3) and discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.

A shutter 808 is arranged above the high-accuracy V-winning sensor 803 so as to cover the high-accuracy V-winning sensor 803 from above. The shutter 808 is held in a state in which the first passage portion 801 can be slidably moved in the passage width direction (specifically, the front-rear direction). That is, the shutter 808 has a protruding position (advanced position) that protrudes into the first passage portion 801 and a retracted position (retracted position) that retracts backward from the protruding position and suppresses the amount of protrusion into the first passage portion 801. ) And can be displaced.

As shown in FIG. 46A, when the shutter 808 is arranged at the protruding position, the shutter 808 blocks the flow path to the high accuracy V region 803a. As a result, the high-accuracy V region 803a is closed, and the game ball that has entered the right entrance portion 504 cannot pass through the high-accuracy V winning sensor 803. The game ball whose inflow to the high-accuracy V region 803a is restricted by the shutter 808 comes into contact with the upper surface portion 808a of the shutter 808, is guided to the second passage portion 804, and passes through the discharge sensor 805.

The upper surface portion 808a of the shutter 808 is an inclined surface that descends to the second passage portion 804 side, whereby the game ball is satisfactorily guided to the second passage portion 804. The height position of the shutter 808 is a height position that does not obstruct the flow of the game ball to the second passage portion 804 in the state where the shutter 808 is arranged at the protruding position, specifically, there is a step enough to catch the game ball. It is set at a height position that is not formed between the upper surface portion 808a and the second passage portion 804. In the present embodiment, the upper surface portion 808a is inclined at substantially the same inclination angle as the second passage portion 804, and is set at a height position where a substantially linear spherical passage is formed by the upper surface portion 706a and the branch passage portion 704. ing.

As shown in FIG. 46B, when the shutter 808 is arranged at the retracted position, the shutter 808 retracts from above the high-accuracy V region 803a, and the region 803a is opened upward. As a result, the high-accuracy V region 803a is opened, and the game ball that has entered the right entrance portion 504 can pass through the high-accuracy V winning sensor 803. Further, the game ball that has passed through the high-accuracy V winning sensor 803 flows down the third passage portion 806 to reach the left vertical passage portion 508, and also passes through the continuous V winning sensor 807.

In the present embodiment, when the high-accuracy V region 803a is in the closed state, the game ball cannot pass through the high-accuracy V winning sensor 803, but it can pass in a range that is harder to pass than in the open state. May be. The point is that the ease of passage of the high-accuracy V winning sensor 803 may differ between the open state and the closed state, and the degree of closing or opening is arbitrary.

The front region of the passage structure is a light transmission region, and the game ball flowing through the passage structure can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The entire passage structure does not necessarily have to be visible, and at least the shutter 808 (the distribution status of the game ball) and the high-accuracy V winning sensor 803 (the game ball passes through the detection area of the high-accuracy V winning sensor 803). It suffices if the continuous V winning sensor 807 (whether or not the game ball has passed the detection area of the continuous V winning sensor 807) can be visually recognized.

The variable winning device 32 is provided with a drive unit 809 for the shutter that drives the shutter 808. The drive unit 809 has a solenoid as a drive source and a link mechanism as a drive force transmission means for transmitting the drive force of the solenoid to the shutter 808. The solenoid is electrically connected to the main control device 81 and is driven based on a drive signal from the main control device 81. When the solenoid is driven, the shutter 808 retracts from the protruding position to the retracted position, and the high-accuracy V region 803a switches from the closed state to the open state. When the output of the drive signal from the main control device 81 is stopped, the shutter 808 is advanced from the retracted position to the protruding position by the urging force of the urging means (spring or the like), and the high accuracy V region 803a is cut from the open state to the closed state. It will change.

As shown in FIG. 47, in the vicinity of the variable winning device 32 on the front surface of the game board 24a, the first display unit 811 in which the character "A" is displayed and the second display unit 811 in which the character "B" is displayed are displayed. A display unit 812 is provided. The first display unit 811 is arranged above the left side entrance portion 505, and the second display unit 812 is arranged above the right side entrance portion 504, and the flow path through which the game ball enters the left side entrance portion 505 is route A to the player. , The flow path through which the game ball enters the right entrance portion 504 is provided as a B route.

Next, the operation mode of the shutter 808 (opening / closing mode of the high-accuracy V region 803a) will be described with reference to FIG. 48. FIG. 48A is an explanatory diagram of a jackpot type table according to the present embodiment, FIG. 48B is an explanatory diagram of a shutter distribution table, and FIG. 48C is an explanatory diagram of an opening / closing mode of a high-accuracy V region 803a.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48A, four types of jackpots, 16R jackpot result A to 16R jackpot result D, are provided, and the shutter 808 is designed to correspond to each of these jackpot types. The operation mode of is set. The operation mode of the shutter 808 corresponding to each jackpot type is defined in the shutter distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 113b of the ROM 113.

As shown in FIG. 48 (b), in the shutter distribution table, the operation mode of the shutter 808 in the 5th, 10th, and 16th rounds of the round game is defined according to each jackpot type. .. As for the operation mode of the shutter 808, the game ball that has entered the right entrance portion 504 cannot be distributed to the high accuracy V winning sensor 803 side, or it is easier to distribute to the second passage portion 804 side than the high accuracy V winning sensor 803 side. Distribution mode and high distribution mode in which the game ball that has entered the right entrance portion 504 can be distributed to the high accuracy V winning sensor 803 side, or is easier to distribute to the high accuracy V winning sensor 803 side than the second aisle portion 804 side. There are two types, and.

In the shutter distribution table, it is determined for each jackpot type which of these modes the shutter 808 is operated for each of the above rounds. Specifically, in the 16R jackpot result A, the operation is performed in the high distribution mode in the 10th round, and in the 5th and 16th rounds, the operation is performed in the low distribution mode, and in the 16R jackpot result B, the performance is high in the 5th round. The distribution mode is operated in the low distribution mode in the 10th and 16th rounds, and in the 16R jackpot result C, the high distribution mode is in the 16th round and the low distribution mode is in the 5th and 10th rounds. It is set to work with. Further, in the 16R jackpot result D, all of the 5th, 10th, and 16th rounds are set to operate in a low distribution mode. In any of the 16R jackpot results A to 16R jackpot results D, the shutter 808 does not operate in the round game other than the above, and the high accuracy V region 803a is closed.

Here, the low distribution mode and the high distribution mode will be described with reference to FIG. 48 (c). First, a low distribution mode will be described. In the low distribution mode, the shutter 808 opening operation (displacement from the protruding position to the retracted position) is executed only once in the round game. Specifically, it is as follows.

As shown in FIG. 48 (c-1), at the start timing (timing t1) of the round game, the shutter 808 is located at the protruding position (the position where the high accuracy V region 803a is closed). Then, at the timing t2 when the first winning of the variable winning device 32 occurs, the position is displaced to the retracted position (the position where the high accuracy V region 803a is opened), and a predetermined short period (for example, 0.01 sec) elapses. After that, it returns to the protruding position. In this case, since the opening period of the shutter 808 is short, the game ball that has entered the right entrance portion 504 is distributed to the second passage portion 804 side by the shutter 808 and passes through the discharge sensor 805.

Next, the high distribution mode will be described. In the high distribution mode, the opening operation of the shutter 808 is executed twice in the round game. Of these, the first opening operation is the same as the opening operation in the low distribution mode, and thus the description thereof will be omitted. As shown in FIG. 48 (c-2), when the second winning of the variable winning device 32 occurs at the timing t3, the shutter 808 is displaced to the retracted position as the second opening operation. After that, the shutter 808 returns to the protruding position at the timing t4 when a predetermined period (for example, 1 sec) has elapsed. In this case, since the opening period of the shutter 808 is longer than that in the low distribution mode, the game ball that has entered the right entrance portion 504 is distributed to the high accuracy V winning sensor 803 side, and the high accuracy V winning sensor 803 Pass through.

In the present embodiment, as in the third embodiment, the game ball detects the required period from when the game ball passes through the detection area of the winning sensor 802 to when it reaches the arrangement area of the shutter 808. The distance between the winning sensor 802 and the shutter 808 is set so as to be longer than the required period from passing through the region until the shutter 808 is displaced to the retracted position. Further, the opening period of the shutter 808 in the second opening operation is set longer than the required period until the game ball passing through the winning sensor 802 reaches the high-accuracy V winning sensor 803. Therefore, when the second opening operation is performed, the winning ball that triggered the opening of the shutter 808 passes through the high-accuracy V winning sensor 803.

<Normal processing>
Next, the normal processing executed by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 49. This process is executed in place of the normal process of FIG. In FIG. 49, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as those in FIG. 14, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

After executing the electric service support process in step S205, the V distribution process for driving and controlling the shutter 808 is executed in step S3001. Here, the V distribution process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the V distribution process, first, in step S3101, it is determined whether or not the shutter 808 is being opened, that is, whether or not the shutter 808 is arranged at the retracted position. When the shutter 808 is not opened and the high-accuracy V region 803a is in the closed state, the process proceeds to step S3102, and the value of the shutter release counter SC provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is "1". It is determined whether or not it is. The release counter SC is for counting the number of times the shutter 808 is opened.

If the value of the release counter SC is not "1", the process proceeds to step S3103, and it is determined whether or not it is the first release timing of the shutter 808. As described above, the first opening timing corresponds to the timing at which the first winning of the variable winning device 32 occurs in the fifth, tenth, and sixteenth round games.

If it is the first opening timing, the process proceeds to step S3104, and the shutter distribution table (FIG. 48 (b)) stored in the distribution table storage area 113b of the ROM 113 is referred to, and the shutter in this round game is used. It is determined whether or not the operation mode of 808 is a high distribution mode. In the case of the high distribution mode, "2" is set in the value of the opening counter SC in step S3106, and in the case of not the high distribution mode, that is, in the case of the low distribution mode, step S3107 is performed. Set the value of the open counter SC to "1".

After the execution of step S3106 or step S3107, the opening period of the shutter 808 in the first opening is set in step S3108. Specifically, the value of the timer counter T2 provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is set to "50" (0.1 sec). In the following step S3109, the drive unit 809 is put into a drive state in order to open the shutter 808.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3102 (when the value of the release counter SC is "1"), the process proceeds to step S3110 to determine whether or not it is the second opening timing of the shutter 808. As described above, the second opening timing corresponds to the timing at which the second winning of the variable winning device 32 occurs in the round game of the round set in the high distribution mode.

If it is the second opening timing, the process proceeds to step S3111, and the value of the timer counter T2 is set to "500" (1 sec) in order to set the opening period for the second opening. After that, the process proceeds to step S3109 to execute the release process of the shutter 808. After the execution of step S3109, if a negative determination is made in step S3103 (when it is not the first opening timing) or when a negative determination is made in step S3110 (when it is not the second opening timing), the V distribution process is terminated.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3101 (when the shutter 808 is open), the process proceeds to step S3112 to determine whether or not the value of the timer counter T2 is "0". This process determines whether or not the opening period of the shutter 808 set in step S3108 or step S3111 has elapsed.

When the value of the timer counter T2 is "0" (when the opening period of the shutter 808 has elapsed), in step S3113, the drive unit 809 is put into a non-drive state in order to close the shutter 808. In the following step S3114, the value of the opening counter SC is decremented by 1, and the number of times the shutter 808 is opened is updated. After the execution of step S3114 or when a negative determination is made in step S3112 (when the value of the timer counter T2 is not "0"), the V distribution process ends.

Returning to the description of the normal process (FIG. 49), after executing the V distribution process of step S3001, the process proceeds to step S206 to execute the game ball launch control process for controlling the launch of the game ball.

<Opening and closing of the winning opening>
Next, the large winning opening processing in step S510 (FIG. 17) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is executed in place of the large winning opening opening / closing process of FIG. In FIG. 51, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as those in FIG. 18, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

If it is determined in step S603 that the value of the timer counter T is "0", the setting process for each round is executed in step S3201. Since this process is the same as the process of FIG. 20 according to the first embodiment, it will be described with reference to FIG. 20.

In the setting process for each round, first, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "16". If the value of the round counter RC is not "16", the continuation flag stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 is deleted in step S802.

After the execution of step S802 or when a positive determination is made in step S801 (when the value of the round counter RC is "16"), the opening period of the variable winning device 32 in the round game to be set is set in step S803. .. Specifically, the value of the timer counter T is set to "15000", which corresponds to the upper limit opening period (30 sec) for one round.

In the following step S804, based on the jackpot type flag stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114, the jackpot type corresponding to the open / close execution mode being executed or being executed is grasped. Further, in this step, based on the value of the round counter RC, it is grasped which round game the round game to be set (the round game to be started from now on) is the round game. In the following step S805, the maximum number of winnings to the variable winning device 32 in the round game to be set is set with reference to the upper limit numbering table stored in the sorting table storage area 113b of the ROM 113.

Here, the upper limit number distribution table according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 52. In the present embodiment, the maximum number of winnings in each round game is standardized in the 16 jackpot results A to 16R jackpot results C. Specifically, in all of the 16 jackpot results A to 16R jackpot results C, the maximum number of winnings in the 5th, 10th, and 16th rounds is 2, and in the other rounds it is 8. It has become. In the open / close execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result D, the maximum number of winnings is standardized in all round games, and is 5 in each round. The specific maximum number of winning prizes shown in FIG. 52 is only an example, and is not limited to these numbers.

Returning to the setting process for each round (FIG. 20), in step S805, the result of grasping the jackpot type in the step S804 and the round game to be set is the round game of which round, and the upper limit number distribution table. Based on the above, the corresponding maximum winning number is derived. In the following step S806, a value corresponding to the above-derived upper limit winning number is set as the value of the winning counter PC provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114. After the execution of step S806, the setting process for each round ends.

Returning to the description of the large winning opening opening / closing process (FIG. 51), after executing the setting process for each round in step S3201, the large winning opening opening process is executed in step S605.

If an affirmative judgment is made in step S602 in the large winning opening opening / closing process (when the value of the timer counter T is "0"), the detection state of the winning sensor 509 or the winning sensor 802 in step S3202 (step of FIG. 13). Based on the reading results of the various sensors in S101), it is determined whether or not a prize has been generated in the variable winning device 32. When a prize is generated in the variable winning device 32, the process proceeds to step S3203, and the value of the winning counter PC is decremented by 1. After the execution of step S3203 or when a negative determination is made in step S3202 (when the variable winning device 32 has not been won), the process proceeds to step S3204, and the continuous V winning flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. Determine if it has been done.

Here, the V winning process in step S106 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 53. This process is executed in place of the V winning process of FIG.

The processes of steps S3301 to S3306 are for grasping that the game ball has passed the continuous V winning sensor 807 (occurrence of continuous V winning), and "V winning" is regarded as "continuous V winning". It is the same as in steps S701 to S706 of FIG. 19 except for the above points. The continuous V winning flag in step S3305 is a flag indicating that a continuous V winning has occurred, and the continuous V winning command in step S3306 is for notifying the effect control device 82 that a continuous V winning has occurred. It is a command.

After the execution of step S3304 or step S3306, in step S3307, it is determined whether or not the high-accuracy V winning flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. The high-accuracy V-winning flag is a flag indicating that the game ball has passed the high-accuracy V-winning sensor 803 (occurrence of high-accuracy V-winning). If the high-accuracy V-winning flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3308, and whether or not a high-accuracy V-winning has occurred based on the detection state of the high-accuracy V-winning sensor 803 (reading result of various sensors in step S101). (Whether or not the game ball has passed through the detection area of the high-accuracy V winning sensor 803) is determined.

If it is determined that the high accuracy V prize has occurred, it is determined in step S3309 whether or not the high accuracy V prize is valid. The valid period is a predetermined period that is predetermined in anticipation of a period in which a high probability V prize can be normally generated. For example, a period in which the shutter 808 is opened is set as the valid period. If it is determined that the validity period is not in effect, the process proceeds to step S3310, an error command is set assuming that an error has occurred, and then the V winning process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the period is valid, the process proceeds to step S3311, and the high-accuracy V winning flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. In the following step S3312, a high-accuracy V winning command is set as a transmission target to the effect control device 82. The high-accuracy V winning command is a command for notifying the effect control device 82 that a high-accuracy V winning command has occurred. After the execution of step S3312, if the affirmative judgment is made in step S3307 (when the high probability V winning flag is stored) or the negative judgment is made in step S3308 (when the high probability V winning is not generated), the V winning is used. End the process.

Returning to the description of the large winning opening opening / closing process (FIG. 51), if it is determined in step S3204 that the continuous V winning flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S3205. In step S3205, the continuation V winning flag stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 is deleted, and the continuation flag is set in the various flag storage areas 114e. The continuation flag is a flag indicating that the next round game should be executed, in other words, the open / close execution mode should be continued even after the running round game is completed.

After the execution of step S3205 or when a negative determination is made in step S3204 (when the continuous V winning flag is not stored), it is determined in step S613 whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is "0". Also in this embodiment, after the continuation flag is stored in step S3205, the process of setting the value of the winning counter PC to "0" (process of step S612 in FIG. 18) is not executed, and the process of step S613 is performed. Execute the process. That is, as in the third embodiment, when V winning occurs during the round game, if the number of winnings to the variable winning device 32 at that time is less than the upper limit winning number, the round game is terminated. Instead, the round game is continued until the number of winnings reaches the upper limit opening period or the opening period of the variable winning device 32 reaches the upper limit opening period.

<Transition processing at the end of open / close execution mode>
Next, the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is executed in place of the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode of FIG. 22. In FIG. 54, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as those in FIG. 22, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

In this transition process, first, in step S3401, it is determined whether or not the high-accuracy V winning flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. If the high-probability V winning flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S902, the high-probability V winning flag stored in the various flag storage areas 114e is deleted, and the high-probability mode flag is set in the area 114e. To do. As a result, the lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode. In the following step S903, the high frequency support mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 114e. As a result, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode.

If it is determined in step S3401 that the high-accuracy V winning flag is not stored, the high-frequency support mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 114e in step S904, and the game count counter GC is set in step S905. Set to "100". After the execution of step S903 or step S905, the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode ends.

<About the flow of the game in the open / close execution mode>
Next, the flow of the game in the open / close execution mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 and 55 to 57.

As described above, in the present embodiment, if the continuous V winning is not generated in the running round game, the next round game is not executed, and if the round game ends without the continuous V winning occurring, the round game is not executed. The open / close execution mode is configured to end at that point (see FIG. 51). Further, as shown in FIG. 46, a high-accuracy V winning sensor 803 is provided in the variable winning device 32. When the game ball passes through the high probability V winning sensor 803 during the opening / closing execution mode (when a high probability V winning occurs), the lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high probability mode, and the high probability V winning sensor 803 If the game ball does not pass through, the lottery mode after the open / close execution mode becomes the low probability mode.

Further, in the large winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32, a left entrance portion 505 connected to the continuous V winning sensor 807 and a right entrance portion 504 connected to the high accuracy V winning sensor 803 are provided. A shutter 808 is arranged on the upstream side of the high accuracy V winning sensor 803 in the right entrance portion 504, and the operation mode of the shutter 808 is such that the game ball entering the right entrance portion 504 is placed on the high accuracy V winning sensor 803 side. A high distribution mode that is easy to distribute or distribute, and a low distribution mode that does not distribute or difficult to distribute the game ball that has entered the right entrance portion 504 to the high accuracy V winning sensor 803 side are set. When the game ball is distributed to the high accuracy V winning sensor 803 side, the game ball passes through the high accuracy V winning sensor 803 and then the continuous V winning sensor 807 (FIG. 46 (b)). That is, both a high-accuracy V-winning and a continuous V-winning will occur. On the other hand, when the game ball is not distributed to the high-accuracy V winning sensor 803 side, the game ball passes through the discharge sensor 805 and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 (FIG. 46 (a)). That is, neither the high-accuracy V prize nor the continuous V prize will occur.

Further, on the upstream side of the variable winning device 32, a game ball launched with a strength less than a predetermined amount is guided to the left entrance portion 505, and a game ball launched with a strength equal to or more than a predetermined amount is guided to the right entrance portion 504. A guide passage portion 401 is provided to guide the vehicle (see FIG. 5). That is, it is possible to select which of the right entrance portion 504 and the left entrance portion 505 is to win the game ball according to the player's intention.

As described above, in any of the open / close execution modes corresponding to the 16R jackpot results A to 16R jackpot results C, the shutter 808 does not operate in the round games of the first to fourth rounds, and the high accuracy V region 803a is set. Since it is left in the closed state, the player performs a firing operation so that the game ball wins the left entrance portion 505. As a result, continuous V winning is generated in the round game of each round, and the game proceeds to the fifth round game.

At a predetermined timing (for example, the start timing of the waiting period between the fourth rounds) before the start of the fifth round game, the pachinko machine 10 executes the first effect DR1. The first effect DR1 is for urging the player to select whether to make the left entrance portion 505 win the game ball or the right entrance portion 504 to win the game ball. As shown in FIG. 56 (a), in the first effect DR1, for example, on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, together with the character image 601 imitating a god, "select either route A or route B. A message image 821 with characters such as "ja" is displayed. The first production DR1 is continued until the end of the fifth round game ball.

For example, it is assumed that the open execution mode corresponds to the 16R jackpot result A, and the shutter 808 is driven in a low distribution mode in the fifth round game (FIG. 48 (b)). In this case, when the player selects the B route and wins the game ball in the right entrance portion 504, the shutter 808 is driven in a low distribution mode, so that the game ball is moved to the discharge sensor 805 side. It will be sorted and neither high-accuracy V-winning nor continuous V-winning will occur. As a result, as shown in the middle part of FIG. 55 (a), the open / close execution mode ends with the end of the fifth round game, resulting in a so-called puncture. Further, in this case, since the opening / closing execution mode ends in a state where the high probability V winning has not occurred, the lottery mode becomes the low probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends.

Then, at the start timing of the ending, the second effect DR2 that suggests or teaches that the challenge game to the high accuracy mode has failed is executed. As shown in FIG. 56 (b), in the second effect DR2, for example, on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, characters such as "Sorry. I'm expecting next" are displayed together with the character image 601. The message image 822 is displayed. The second production DR2 is executed at least part of the ending period.

On the other hand, when the player selects the A route and makes the game ball win the left entrance portion 505, the game ball passes through the continuous V winning sensor 807 and the continuous V winning occurs, so that the sixth round A round game is performed. In this case, the third effect DR3 is executed in the waiting period of the fifth round or the round game of the sixth round. As shown in FIG. 56 (c), in the third effect DR3, for example, a message image 823 displaying characters such as "superb!" Is displayed together with the character image 601.

After that, at a predetermined timing before the start of the 10th round game, the first production DR1 is executed again, and whether the left entrance portion 505 is to win the game ball or the right entrance portion 504 is to win the game ball. You will be prompted to choose. When the open execution mode corresponds to the 16R jackpot result A, the shutter 808 is driven in a high distribution mode in the 10th round game (FIG. 48 (b)).

In this case, when the player selects the B route and makes the game ball win the right entrance portion 504 side, the game ball passes through the high accuracy V winning sensor 803 and the high accuracy V winning occurs. To do. Further, since the game ball passes through the continuous V winning sensor 807 and the continuous V winning is generated, the round game of the 11th round is executed. In this case, in the waiting period of the 10th round or the round game of the 11th round, the effect DR4 that suggests or teaches that the challenge game to the high accuracy mode is successful is executed. As shown in FIG. 57 (a), in the fourth effect DR4, for example, on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, characters such as "well cut off !! Let's give a reward" are displayed together with the character image 601. The displayed message image 824 is displayed. Then, after the fourth effect DR4 is displayed for a certain period of time, a round effect image for probability variation is displayed on the display screen G to congratulate the occurrence of the high probability V prize.

After that, in the 16th round game, the shutter 808 is driven in a low distribution mode, but since it is the final round of the open / close execution mode, the game ball is either awarded to the left entrance portion 505 side or the right entrance portion. Regardless of whether the 504 side wins a prize, the open / close execution mode is executed to the end. After the end of the open / close execution mode, the lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode based on the occurrence of a high probability V prize during the execution of the open / close execution mode. That is, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 55A, the opening / closing execution mode is completed, and the lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high probability mode. In the waiting period of the 15th round, the first effect DR1 is not executed, and the round effect image for probability variation or the standby period effect image for probability variation is displayed.

On the other hand, if the player selects the A route in the 10th round game and the game ball is won on the left entrance portion 505 side, a continuous V prize is generated and the 11th round game is executed. Will be done. However, since the shutter 808 is not driven in the high distribution mode after that, the high accuracy V prize does not occur, and the challenge game to the high accuracy mode fails. That is, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 55 (a), although the open / close execution mode is completed, the transition to the high probability mode does not occur. In this case, the second effect DR2 is executed in the waiting period of the 10th round or the round game of the 11th round, and then the round effect image for normal use (non-probability variation) different from the round effect image for the probability variation. Is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 55 (b) and 55 (c), even when the opening / closing execution mode corresponds to the 16R jackpot result B or the 16R jackpot result C, the 5th, 10th, and 16th rounds In each round game, the number of round games performed in the open / close execution mode (and the total prize ball) depends on whether the player shoots the game ball at the left entrance portion 505 or the right entrance portion 504. There is a difference in the number) and the lottery mode after the open / close execution mode (the degree of advantage in the game after the open / close execution mode). The opening / closing execution mode corresponds to the 16R jackpot result B, and when the shutter 808 is driven in a high distribution mode in the fifth round game, the player moves the right entrance portion 504 side in the round game. When the aim is to generate a high-accuracy V prize, the fifth effect DR5 is executed to encourage the left entrance portion 505 to win the game ball in the waiting period of the 9th round or the round game of the 10th round. To. As shown in FIG. 57 (b), in the fifth effect DR5, for example, a message image 825 displaying characters such as "Aim for route A" is displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being offended by the puncture in the open / close execution mode in the middle, even though the high-accuracy V prize is generated.

As described above, depending on the difference in the firing operation of the game balls in the open / close execution mode, whether or not to shift to the high probability mode after the open / close execution mode is changed, or the total number of prize balls in the open / close execution mode is changed. Therefore, the player can predict the round in which the shutter 808 is driven in the high distribution mode, and can realize the playability in which the right entrance portion 504 is selected and enjoyed in which round. As a result, it is preferably suppressed that the game in the open / close execution mode becomes monotonous, and the game in the mode can be greatly excited.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

A left entrance portion 505 (first region) and a right entrance portion 504 (second region) are provided so that the player can hit the game ball separately. Regarding the left entrance portion 505, the first game situation (shutter 865 is high). Regardless of whether it is a distribution mode (driven situation) or a second game situation (a situation in which the shutter 865 is driven in a low distribution mode), the first privilege (round continuation) can be obtained. Regarding the right entrance portion 504, although it is possible to obtain a second privilege (transition to a high probability mode) that is more advantageous than the first privilege under the first game situation, the first privilege and the first privilege under the second game state The configuration is such that neither of the second benefits can be obtained.

According to the above configuration, either the game ball is inserted into the left entrance portion 505 to aim for the first privilege, or the game ball is inserted into the right entrance portion 504 to obtain both the first privilege and the second privilege. The player himself can choose whether to take the risk that he cannot do and aim to acquire the second privilege. In this case, since the judgment of the player affects the result of the game, active participation in the game can be achieved, and the degree of attention to the game can be improved. Further, in the above configuration, a player who wants to acquire a large second privilege while enjoying the thrill of not being able to acquire either the first privilege or the second privilege actively inserts the game ball into the right entrance portion 504. A player who plays a game and does not like such a thrill can play a game in which the game ball enters the left entrance portion 505. That is, it is possible to change the way of playing according to the taste of each player and the mood of each player, and it is possible to provide various ways of enjoying with one game machine.

One round game in the open / close execution mode is in the first game situation, and the other one round game is in the second game situation. In this case, the player is forced to select whether to aim at the left entrance portion 505 or the right entrance portion 504 while playing the opening / closing execution mode, and the opening / closing execution mode is set in a certain tension. You can play. As a result, the game in the mode can be greatly excited as compared with the case where the open / close execution mode is simply digested, and the motivation for the game can be suitably increased.

Regarding the 10th round game, the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result A is the first game situation, and the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result B is the second game situation. That is, even in the same round game, the first game situation or the second game situation differs depending on the type of open / close execution mode, and there are various rounds (timing) to aim at the right entrance portion 504. Has been transformed. In this case, since the round to aim at the right entrance portion 504 is not uniquely determined from the player's point of view, it is possible to enhance the fun of aiming at the left entrance portion 505 and the right entrance portion 504 while predicting the round. ..

The first privilege will continue the round, and the second privilege will shift to the high probability mode. In this case, it is possible to realize a game aiming at the transition to the high probability mode with the risk that the next round game is not executed and the open / close execution mode ends, and the game in the open / close execution mode is preferably excited. Becomes possible.

<Other embodiments>
The description is not limited to the above-described embodiments and modifications, and may be implemented as follows, for example. By the way, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, or may be partially or wholly combined and applied to each of the above-described embodiments and modifications. Further, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or a part of the various configurations shown in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effect to be exerted) of each configuration to be combined is guaranteed. Each of the following configurations may be individually applied to a new configuration composed of a combination of embodiments and modifications, and some or all of them may be combined and applied.

(1) In each of the above embodiments, a so-called one-type pachinko machine has been illustrated, but the present invention is based on a complete deviation result in a one-type two-type mixed type pachinko machine and a winning / failing lottery result of a second special symbol. For other types of pachinko machines, such as pachinko machines equipped with a so-called small hit rush function, which includes a large number of special missed results or special hit results (so-called small hits) and increases the number of balls obtained by frequent small hit games. It can also be applied to.

Examples of the one-type and two-type mixed type pachinko machines are as follows. When the result of the winning / losing lottery based on the winning of one of the operating ports 33 is the jackpot result, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode (big hit game state) in which the variable winning device 32 is opened and closed. When the jackpot result is obtained based on the winning of the operation port 33, the jackpot result that shifts to the time-saving game state after the end of the open / close execution mode and the normal game state (shift to the time-saving game state) No time saving jackpot result is set, and when it is distributed to the jackpot result with time saving, it shifts to the time saving game state (so-called rush state) after the opening / closing execution mode ends.

In the time-saving game state, the frequency of winning the other operating port 34 is high, but the winning or losing lottery based on the winning of the operating port 34 includes a small hit result, and if the small hit result is obtained, , The variable winning device 32 or a second variable winning device different from the variable winning device 32 is opened and closed, and the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode (small hit game state). Then, the game ball winning in the variable winning device 32 or the second variable winning device passes through the V winning opening provided in the winning device, which is more advantageous for the player than in the case of the small hit result. Shifts to the open / close execution mode (big hit game state) in which the variable winning device 32 or the second variable winning device is opened / closed.

The types of small hit results include a small hit result with a time reduction that shifts to a time-saving game state when the game ball passes through the V winning opening and shifts to the big hit gaming state, and a game ball that shifts to the V winning opening. When the player passes through and shifts to the big hit gaming state, the result is set to shift to the normal gaming state (does not shift to the time saving gaming state). That is, when the small hit game corresponding to the small hit result with the time reduction is performed, the game ball passes through the V winning opening, so that the game shifts to the time reduction game state again after the big hit game is completed. A plurality of stop results corresponding to small hits are set for each small hit result, and the stop result selected from them is stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 43 in the game times of winning the small hit. .. When the big hit game is executed after the small hit game, the stop result is continuously displayed even after the end of the small hit game, and is continuously displayed until the end of the big hit game.

For example, when the third embodiment is applied to the above configuration, when the jackpot result with time reduction is won, or when the jackpot is achieved through the small hit game corresponding to the small hit result with time reduction. In the open / close execution mode, if the game ball passes through the fall area 703a, it does not shift to the time-saving game state (shifts to the normal game state) after the end of the jackpot game, and if the game ball passes through the fall area 703a. , It can be configured to shift to the time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game.

Further, when applying a configuration in which specific notification (notification that enables the player to recognize the maximum number of winning prizes) based on the stop result of the special figure display unit 43 is applied to the above configuration, a small hit game is followed by a big hit. In this case, the maximum number of winnings in each round game in the big hit game can be made to correspond to each stop result for the small hit, and the specific notification can be performed based on the stop result for the small hit.

Further, as a pachinko machine equipped with a small hit RUSH function, there is a pachinko machine having a difference in the degree of advantage of the gaming state depending on the length of the gaming time related to one gaming time in the second special figure. Specifically, when the gaming state is set to a disadvantageous state, the variation display time of the second special figure is made extremely long. As a result, the opening timing of the variable winning device 32 is significantly delayed from the time of winning the operating port, and the opening frequency of the variable winning device 32 per unit time is greatly reduced. On the contrary, when the gaming state is set to the advantageous state, the opening frequency of the variable winning device 32 per unit time is increased by shortening the variable display time of the second special figure. With such a configuration, it is difficult for the player to receive a profit even if the game ball is won in the operating port corresponding to the second special figure (hereinafter referred to as "second operating port") under a disadvantageous state. It is said that it is easy to receive profits only after winning a prize in the second operating port under favorable conditions. The fluctuation display time of the first special figure in the disadvantageous state is set to the same time length as that of a general pachinko machine (a shorter time than the fluctuation display time of the second special figure in the disadvantageous state), which is a disadvantageous state. In this case, it is possible to play a game by winning a game ball in the operating port corresponding to the first special figure (hereinafter, referred to as “first operating port”). Further, in a pachinko machine having such a configuration, if the game round of the second special figure is executed under a disadvantageous state, the next game round may not be started for a long period of time. It is configured so that the game times of the special figure and the game times of the second special figure can be executed in duplicate.

For example, when the third embodiment is applied to the above configuration, when the jackpot result corresponding to the transition to the advantageous state (rush state) after the open / close execution mode is won, the jackpot result is obtained. If the game ball passes through the fall area 703a during the execution of the corresponding open / close execution mode, the advantageous state does not occur after the end of the open / close execution mode (a disadvantageous state in which the fluctuation display time of the second special figure is extremely long). Alternatively, although the small hit game itself is frequently executed, the variable winning device for small hits does not receive a prize or shifts to an intermediate state in which it is less likely to occur than in an advantageous state).

(2) In each of the above embodiments, either the number of winning games balls to the variable winning device 32 has reached the upper limit winning number or the opening period of the variable winning device 32 has reached the upper limit opening period. The round game is terminated when is satisfied, but the latter condition may not be satisfied and the round game may be terminated when the former is established.

(3) In each of the above embodiments, a specific area (detection area of V winning sensor 507, falling area 703a, high accuracy V area 803a) is provided in the ball entering area (variable winning device 32) provided with the opening / closing means. However, it may be configured to be provided in the ball entry region where the opening / closing means is not provided. That is, in the variable winning device 32 according to each of the above-described embodiments, "in the game area PE, a ball entry area is partitioned so as to have a space inside the game area PE, and at least one ball entry area is formed. A mouth (ball entry portion) is provided, and the game ball can enter the space portion (inside the ball entry region) through the ball entry port (in other words, without passing through the ball entry port). (It is a configuration that the game ball cannot enter the space part), an opening and closing means for opening and closing the ball entrance is provided, and a specific area is provided in the space part or on the downstream side of the space part. It can be said that the game ball that has entered the space can pass through the specific area, but the opening / closing means may be omitted.

(4) In each of the above embodiments, the guide passage portion 401 is configured to guide both the left entrance portion 505 of the game ball and the right entrance portion 504 of the game ball. The configuration may be such that only guidance to the entrance portion 504 is performed. Further, in each of the above embodiments, the guide passage portion 401 is composed of a resin member (continuous wall portion), but at least a part thereof may be composed of a game nail.

(5) In each of the above embodiments, the game ball that has passed through the specific area (detection area of V winning sensor 507, fall area 703a, high accuracy V area 803a) goes to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through a discharge passage (not shown). Although it is configured to be discharged, it may be configured to be discharged to the gaming area PE. This also applies to the game ball that has passed through the detection areas of the winning sensor 509, the V winning sensor 705, the discharge sensor 805, and the continuous V winning sensor 807.

(6) In each of the above embodiments, the variable winning device 32 can be won when the game ball flows down the right route, but the variable winning device 32 is won when the game ball flows down the left route. The configuration may be such that the variable winning device 32 can be won regardless of whether the game ball flows down the right route or the left route. In the latter configuration, when the game ball flows down one of the left route or the right route, the game ball enters the left entrance portion 505, and when the game ball flows down the other of the left route or the right route. It is preferable that the game ball enters the right entrance portion 504. That is, it suffices if the left entrance portion 505 and the right entrance portion 504 can be separated from each other, and the specific configuration thereof is not particularly limited.

(7) In each of the above embodiments, notification is performed for each of the case where the game ball enters the left entrance portion 505 and the case where the game ball enters the right entrance portion 504, and the notification mode in the former case and the latter case. The configuration may be different from the notification mode of the case. Further, the notification may be performed only when the ball enters either the left entrance portion 505 or the right entrance portion 504. Specifically, the notification is given only when the ball enters the right entrance portion 504. It may be configured to perform. With these configurations, it becomes easy for the player to grasp which entrance the game ball has entered. In this case, in order to prevent the notification from becoming confusing, it is preferable to perform the notification also as a notification that a prize has been generated in the variable winning device 32.

(8) In each of the above embodiments, the hold information is acquired based on the winning of each of the operating ports 33 and 34, and the hold information is stored up to a predetermined number (4 each). , The hold information may not be stored. Further, the number of reserved information held based on the winning of each operating port 33, 34 may be less than 3 or 5 or more. The same applies to the acquisition of hold information based on winning a prize in the through gate 35 (hold information in the general drawing). Further, the upper limit number of stored information based on the winning of each of the operating ports 33 and 34 may be different.

(9) In each of the above embodiments, the game rounds are executed in the order in which the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are awarded, but based on the winning of the second operating port 34. The game times of the second special figure may be executed with priority over the game times of the first special figure based on the winning of the first operating port 33. In this case, the lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 34 may be given preferential treatment over the lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 33. Specifically, a separate jackpot type table is provided for the first special figure display unit AS and the second special figure display unit BS, and the latter is used for the jackpot type with a larger number of rounds and the high frequency support mode. It is preferable that the distribution is more favorable to the player than the former, such as a high proportion of the jackpot type to be transferred or the jackpot type having a long duration of the high frequency support mode. Further, the game times of the first special figure may be executed with priority over the game times of the second special figure. In this case, the first operation is performed rather than the lottery based on the winning of the second operation port 34. It is preferable that the lottery based on the winning of the mouth 33 is given preferential treatment.

(10) In each of the above embodiments, when the support mode shifts to the high-frequency support mode, the total number of game times of the first special figure and the game times of the second special figure reaches the end reference number of times. , The high-frequency support mode is terminated, but the high-frequency support mode may be terminated when the number of executions of either the first special figure or the second special figure reaches the end reference number. ..

(11) In each of the above embodiments, the specific notification is performed based on the stop result of the special figure display unit 43, but the stop result (symbol strings Z1 to Z3) is stopped and displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41. It may be configured to perform a specific notification by a stop combination for a big hit in. In this case, the specific notification may be performed by both the stop result of the special figure display unit 43 and the stop result of the display screen G, or the special figure display unit 43 may be omitted or the special figure display unit 43 may be used. The specific notification may be performed only by the stop result of the display screen G after the specific notification is not performed.

(12) In the first and second embodiments, the number of types of stop results is three, but may be four or more, or two or less. In addition, the type of stop result (big hit type) and the mode of open / close execution mode (setting pattern of the maximum number of winnings in each round game) are associated with one-to-one, but one mode of the opening / closing execution mode (maximum number of winnings). One setting pattern of) may be associated with a plurality of types of stop results. For example, in the first embodiment, the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result B shown in FIG. 21 (when the maximum number of winnings in the round game in the predetermined round (second round) is eight). The stop result A corresponds to this, but this may be configured to correspond to a plurality of types of stop results having different display modes. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the ease of determining the maximum number of winnings from the stop result, and it is possible to preferably secure the game to be enjoyed by predicting the maximum number of winnings. In this case, the various stop results corresponding to the open / close execution mode of the 16R jackpot result B are the stop results (stop results) corresponding to the other open / close execution modes (each open / close execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result A and the 16R jackpot result C). It is preferable that the configuration does not overlap with A and the stop result C) (the display mode is not the same). As a result, it is possible to prevent the employees of the game hall from being unable to determine the maximum number of winnings from the stop result at all, and it is possible to prevent the diversification of the stop result from hindering fraud detection.

Further, in the above case, regarding the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result C shown in FIG. 21 (when the maximum number of winnings in the round game in the predetermined round (second round) is four), the first And, as in the second embodiment, only the stop result C may correspond, or a plurality of types of stop results having different display modes may correspond to each other. That is, in a configuration in which a plurality of open / close execution modes (setting patterns for the maximum number of winnings for each round game) are provided, at least one of the open / close execution modes has a one-to-many open system in which the open / close execution mode mode and the stop result Any configuration may be used. In the configuration in which a plurality of types of stop results correspond to the open / close execution mode of the 16R jackpot result C, each of the various stop results is in another open / close execution mode (for example, the open / close execution mode of the 16R jackpot result B). It is preferable that the configuration does not overlap with the various stop results corresponding to.

This modification can also be applied to the third or fourth embodiment, and in those embodiments, the number of types of stop results may be 5 or more, 3 or less, and closed. A plurality of types of stop results may be associated with one aspect of the execution mode.

(13) In the first and second embodiments, when the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result B is executed (the maximum number of winnings in the round game in the predetermined round (second round) is eight. When the open / close execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result C is executed (when the maximum number of winnings in the round game in the predetermined round (second round) is four), for example, " The stop result in which the main symbols of "5" are lined up on the effective line can be displayed, and the jackpot stop result of the same symbol combination may be displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41. Since the symbol display device 41 has a larger display area than the special symbol display unit 43, it is assumed that a general player tends to pay more attention to the symbol display device 41 than the special symbol display unit 43. Under such a configuration, by adopting the above configuration, the upper limit winning number can be determined from the stop result of the special figure display unit 43 for the employees of the game hall and the skilled players, while the symbol display device 41 exclusively. For general players who are playing with attention to, it is possible to make it difficult to determine the maximum number of winnings from the stop result. This makes it possible to optimally harmonize the measures against fraud and the game to be enjoyed by predicting the maximum number of winnings.

In the above case, the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result B is executed and the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result C is executed. For example, in the former case, the odd-numbered symbol is doublet. The eyes are stopped or the odd-numbered doublet is more likely to be stopped than the even-numbered doublet, and in the latter case, the even-numbered doublet is stopped or the odd-numbered doublet is more even-numbered. Is likely to be stopped and displayed, and the stop result on the display screen G may be configured to suggest an expected value of which open / close execution mode (which upper limit number of winnings). With such a configuration, the player can refer to the stop result on the display screen G when predicting the maximum number of winnings, and can preferably enhance the game to be enjoyed by predicting the maximum number of winnings. it can.

Not limited to the cases of 16R jackpot result B and 16R jackpot result C, the jackpot stop result of the same pattern combination may be displayed for all open / close execution modes, or some open / close execution modes are targeted. It may be configured so that the jackpot stop result of the same pattern combination can be displayed. Further, in all the open / close execution modes, the stop result on the display screen G and the type of the open / close execution mode (upper limit number of winnings) may correspond to each other in a one-to-one relationship. This modification can also be applied to the third or fourth embodiment.

(14) In each of the above embodiments, the maximum number of winnings for each round game is diversified in one opening / closing execution mode, but a plurality of types of opening / closing execution modes in which the maximum number of winnings for all round games are unified are provided. , The maximum number of winnings may be different between the opening / closing execution modes. For example, an opening / closing execution mode A having an upper limit winning number of 8 for all round games and an opening / closing execution mode B having an upper limit winning number of 5 for all round games may be provided. In this case, in the opening / closing execution modes A and B, the mode of the opening / closing execution mode and the stop result may correspond to each other in a one-to-one relationship, or as in the above (12), the opening / closing execution modes A and B may be used. In at least one of the above, the mode of opening / closing execution mode and the stop result may correspond to each other in a one-to-many relationship.

(15) In each of the above-described embodiments, the maximum number of winnings for each round game is set after the stop result for the jackpot is stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 43 or the display screen G. May be configured to set the maximum number of winnings for each round game before the stop display is displayed. As such a configuration, for example, a configuration in which the maximum number of winnings is set at any timing from the start to the end of the special figure game round of the jackpot winning can be considered.

(16) In each of the above embodiments, the maximum number of winnings for each round game is set by referring to the information of the determined jackpot type (substantially the stop result of the special figure display unit 43). , The maximum number of winnings in each round game may be set with reference to the predetermined information used for determining the stop result such as the jackpot type counter C2. Specifically, on condition that the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is one of "20" to "59", the maximum number of winnings in the predetermined round (second round) is set to eight. The maximum number of winnings in a predetermined round may be set to 4 on condition that the number is any of "60" to "69".

(17) In the first and second embodiments, the opening / closing execution mode (opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result A) in which the maximum number of winnings is 1 is executed in all rounds, and the upper limit winning is performed. The jackpot notification that is stopped and displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41 when the open / close execution mode (open / close execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result B or 16R jackpot result C) in which the number is diversified is executed. The symbol combinations of the above may be different, and the maximum number of winnings may be suggested by the symbol combinations. This also applies to the third and fourth embodiments.

For example, when the open / close execution mode in which the maximum number of winnings is the same is executed in all rounds, the symbol combination in which the main symbols of "7" are lined up on the effective line is stopped and displayed, and the maximum number of winnings is diversified. When the open / close execution mode is executed, it is possible to display a symbol combination on the effective line in which the main symbols other than "7" are stopped and displayed in doublet combinations. At this time, the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result B is executed and the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result C is executed. For example, in the former case, an odd number other than "7" is executed. The doublet of the symbol is stopped and displayed or the doublet of the odd number is more likely to be stopped than the doublet of the even number. In the latter case, the doublet of the even number is stopped or the doublet of the odd number is even more than the doublet. It is also possible that different combinations of main symbols are likely to be stopped or stopped, such as doublet numbers being easily stopped. Further, the same combination of main symbols can be stopped and displayed in both the case where the open / close execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result B is executed and the case where the open / close execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result C is executed. May be. In this case, it may be impossible or difficult to determine the maximum number of winnings from the symbols stopped and displayed on the display screen G.

(18) In the first and second embodiments, the variable winning device 32 is opened in a round game in which the maximum number of winnings is different (for example, each round game in the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result B). The maximum number of winnings and the maximum opening period) are standardized, but in the round game where the maximum number of winnings is the first, the variable winning device 32 is opened in the first opening mode, and the maximum number of winnings is different from the first number. In the number of round games, the variable winning device 32 may be opened in a second opening mode different from the first opening mode. As a result, the open mode of the variable winning device 32 can be utilized as a suggestion effect of the maximum number of winnings.

(19) In the first and second embodiments, the maximum number of rounds is common among the jackpot types, but they may be different. In this case, it is preferable that the maximum number of rounds is larger in the open / close execution mode in which the maximum number of winnings is the same in all rounds than in the opening / closing execution mode in which the maximum number of winnings is diversified. If the maximum number of winnings is the same, it will be easier to complete the open / close execution mode while continuing each round game for a long time. However, if the number of rounds is increased in such open / close execution mode, the game This is because the opportunity for a person to get a big ball is preferably secured, and it becomes easy to arouse the motivation to play.

(20) In the first and second embodiments, the maximum number of winnings cannot be determined or is difficult to determine for all round games, but the maximum number of winnings cannot be determined or difficult to determine for some round games. Good. For example, in each round game from the first round to the fifth round, the maximum number of winnings may be notified by directing or the like, but in the sixth and subsequent round games, such notification may not be performed.

(21) In the first and second embodiments, the next round game (continuation of the round) is given as a privilege when the game ball passes through the detection area of the V winning sensor 507. , The above-mentioned privilege may be such that a transition to a high-probability mode or a high-frequency support mode occurs, or a specific effect is executed. In this case, in order to establish a game that balances whether to acquire the privilege or to continue the running round game for a long time, in exchange for the grant of the privilege, the round game ends and the next round game is started. It is good to do it. Further, when the round game is completed without satisfying the condition for granting the privilege (when the number of winning balls to the variable winning device 32 reaches the upper limit winning number), the opening / closing execution mode may be terminated.

(22) In the first and second embodiments, when the game ball passes through the detection area of the V winning sensor 507, a predetermined condition is satisfied and a privilege is given. However, the predetermined condition is V. The game ball is not limited to passing through the winning sensor 507. For example, a predetermined lottery process may be executed based on the start of the opening / closing execution mode or the start of the round game, and when the lottery is won, the predetermined conditions are satisfied and the privilege may be given. However, from the viewpoint of encouraging active participation in the game, it is preferable to have a configuration in which the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the operation of the player rather than the predetermined condition is satisfied only by the internal processing. In this case, since the player can be involved in the timing at which the predetermined condition is satisfied, it is possible to give a feeling of winning the privilege with his / her own skill, and it is possible to suitably increase the motivation to challenge.

(23) In the first and second embodiments, the V winning sensor 507 (a specific area that triggers the establishment of a predetermined condition) is arranged in the variable winning device 32, but the gaming area PE outside the variable winning device 32. It may be configured to be arranged in. In this case, it is preferable that a specific area is provided so that the game ball launched with a strength that can reach the variable winning device 32 can be reached. Specifically, a specific area is arranged on the upstream side or the downstream side of the variable winning device 32, and a game ball heading for the variable winning device 32 or a game ball passing through the variable winning device 32 without winning a prize is specified. It is preferable that the position of a specific area is set so that the area can be reached, or a member such as a game nail or a guide structure that regulates the flow of the game ball is provided. According to such a configuration, since the predetermined condition can be satisfied while the game ball is won by the variable winning device 32, it is possible to suitably balance the game in the open / close execution mode and the game that satisfies the predetermined condition. Become.

(24) In the first embodiment described above, the specific notification that enables the player to recognize the maximum number of winning prizes is displayed by displaying, but for example, the notification is audibly performed as in the notification using voice. For example, the notification may be performed by a method other than the display. Further, also in the second embodiment described above, both the first specific notification and the second specific notification, which makes it easier for the player to recognize the maximum number of winnings, are displayed. On the other hand, the notification may be performed by a method other than the display, such as notification using voice.

(25) In the second embodiment, the first specific notification based on the stop result displayed on the special figure display unit 43 and the success round effect DR4 (specific image 604) displayed on the display screen G are used. Although both the second specific notification (notification that the player can easily recognize the upper limit winning number than the first specific notification) is performed, the first specific notification may not be performed. That is, the effect DR4 (specific image 604) for the success round may be displayed as a specific notification that enables the player to recognize the maximum number of winnings.

(26) In the second embodiment, a predetermined condition for notifying the upper limit winning number (the game ball passes through the detection area of the V winning sensor 507 at the winning of the upper limit winning number) is in the open / close execution mode. However, it may be configured to be established in the game times. For example, when the first stop result is stopped or displayed as the jackpot stop result of the special symbol display unit 43 or the jackpot stop result of the main symbol which is stopped and displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41. In this case, the notification of the maximum number of prizes is executed, and when the second stop result different from the first stop result is displayed as the stop result for the jackpot, or when the stop is displayed, the notification of the maximum number of prizes is not executed. It can be configured. In this case, the notification of the maximum number of winnings may be performed during the execution of the open / close execution mode (including the opening period) or during the execution of each round game, or during the execution of the game times (stop display of the jackpot stop result). It may be done before).

(27) In the second embodiment described above, when the notification start condition is satisfied during the round game of the predetermined round, the maximum number of winnings is notified at the start of the round game of the next round. The notification of the maximum number of winnings may be started from the waiting time (round interval) between the first round and the next round (the maximum number of winnings set thereafter is notified).

(28) In the second embodiment described above, after the predetermined conditions are satisfied, the maximum number of winnings is notified for all the remaining round games, but the maximum number of winnings is notified only for some round games. It may be configured.

(29) In the second embodiment, when the game ball passes through the detection area of the V winning sensor 507 at the winning number of the upper limit winning number, a predetermined condition for notifying the upper limit winning number is satisfied. However, it is also possible that the predetermined conditions are satisfied by other requirements. For example, a lottery process for whether or not to execute notification is performed, and if the lottery is won, a predetermined condition is satisfied, or if a prize (overflow prize) exceeding the maximum number of prizes of the variable winning device 32 occurs, the predetermined condition is set. It is conceivable that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the predetermined operation is performed after the notification is given to urge the player to perform the predetermined operation with the effect button that can be operated by the player.

(30) In the second embodiment described above, the maximum number of winning prizes is notified for each round, but a plurality of rounds may be notified collectively. However, in consideration of the ease of playing by the player, it is preferable to use the embodiment of the above embodiment.

(31) In the second embodiment described above, the maximum number of winning prizes is notified when the predetermined condition is satisfied, but the maximum number of winning prizes is always notified regardless of whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied. It may be configured.

(32) In the third embodiment, when the game ball passes through the fall area 703a during the open / close execution mode, the game state in the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode (so-called time saving) after the end of the open / close execution mode. Although it is configured to shift to the game state), it may be configured to shift to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode (so-called normal game state). In this case, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured not to have a gaming state of a low probability mode and a high frequency support mode, or may have a configuration having the gaming state. Further, in the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a gaming state of a low probability mode and a high frequency support mode, when the gaming ball passes through the fall area 703a during the opening / closing execution mode, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the time-saving gaming state. , The configuration may be such that a transition to a normal gaming state occurs.

In the third embodiment, if the game ball does not pass through the fall area 703a during the open / close execution mode, the mode shifts to the high probability mode, and if the game ball passes through the fall area 703a, the mode does not shift to the high probability mode. , While shifting to the high-probability mode regardless of the presence or absence of passage, there may be a configuration in which advantages and disadvantages occur depending on whether the mode is passed or not. For example, if the game ball does not pass through the fall area 703a during the open / close execution mode, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the game state shifts to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, and the game ball falls during the open / close execution mode. After passing through the 703a, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the game state may be changed to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode.

(33) In the third embodiment, the round in which the shutter 706 is opened may differ depending on the jackpot type. For example, in the open / close execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result A, the shutter 706 is opened in the 16th round round game, and in the open / close execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result B, the shutter 706 is opened in the 8th round round game. May be. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to realize a configuration in which the opening timing of the shutter 706 differs depending on the jackpot type, as in the third embodiment.

(34) In the third embodiment, the game ball distributed by the shutter 706 to a side different from the fall area 703a side can pass through the V winning sensor 705, and the round continuation is given as a privilege. However, the above-mentioned privilege may be something other than the continuation of the round, such as a transition to a high probability mode or a high frequency support mode, or a specific effect being executed.

(35) In the third embodiment, the fall area 703a is arranged in the variable prize device 32, but the fall area 703a is a prize device other than the variable prize device 32 (a prize ball is paid out when a prize is generated). It may be arranged in the part). In this case, the winning device may be provided with an opening / closing means or may not be provided.

(36) In the third embodiment, the fall area 703a is arranged in the variable winning device 32, but it may be arranged in the game area PE outside the variable winning device 32. In this case, if the game ball does not pass through the fall area 703a during the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the probability variation jackpot as in the third embodiment, the lottery mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high probability mode. If the game ball passes, the lottery mode after the end of the open / close execution mode may be set to the low probability mode. In this case, the fall area 703a may be provided on the upstream side or the downstream side of the variable winning device 32 so that the game ball launched with a strength that can reach the variable winning device 32 can reach the falling area 703a. As a result, it is possible to perform a game aiming at preventing the game ball from passing through the fall area 703a while allowing the variable winning device 32 to win the game ball, and in the open / close execution mode in which the prize ball is acquired by winning the variable winning device 32. It is possible to preferably balance the game and the game of avoiding passing through the fall area 703a and acquiring the transition to the high probability mode.

When the fall area 703a is provided on the upstream side of the variable winning device 32, whether or not the game ball passes through the fall area 703a is determined in the process of checking whether or not the game ball wins in the variable winning device 32. It can be visually recognized, and there is an advantage that it becomes easy for the player to grasp both whether or not the variable winning device 32 has won a prize and whether or not the player has passed through the fall area 703a. On the contrary, when the fall area 703a is provided on the downstream side of the variable winning device 32, the player predicts the opening timing or the opening period of the variable winning device 32, and the device 32 is used without winning the variable winning device 32. It is possible to give a game to be enjoyed by adjusting the launch timing of the game ball so that the passing game ball (spilled ball) does not occur.

Further, when the fall area 703a is arranged in the game area PE, if the game ball passes through the fall area 703a in the situation where the lottery mode is the high probability mode (the situation where the open / close execution mode is not being executed), the lottery mode has a low probability. It may be configured to shift (fall) to the mode. When the high-frequency support mode is provided, when the game ball passes through the fall area 703a in the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode, the game state is changed to the low-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode (so-called time-saving game state). It may be configured to shift to a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode (so-called normal gaming state). In this case, a configuration may be configured in which the transition to the time-saving gaming state and the transition to the normal gaming state are switched based on the number of games played at that time. Specifically, if the number of games after shifting to the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode does not exceed the end reference number of times of the high-frequency support mode, the game shifts to the time-saving game state, and if it exceeds, the normal game It is configured to shift to the state. Further, in the configuration provided with the high-probability support mode, when the game ball passes through the fall area 703a in the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode, the game state shifts to the high-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode. Good. Further, when the high-frequency support mode is not provided, it is preferable that the game ball shifts to the normal game state when the game ball passes through the fall area 703a in the high probability mode and the low-frequency support mode.

In the above configuration, the fall area 703a is provided on the upstream side or the downstream side of the starting winning opening (first operating opening 33 or the second operating opening 34), and the game ball launched with a strength that can reach the starting winning opening. It is preferable that the configuration is such that the fall area 703a can be reached. In the high probability mode, in order to get the next big hit, the game ball must be fired aiming at the starting winning opening, so it is not possible to intentionally avoid the fall area 703a and play, and the fall area 703a Can enhance the significance of.

(37) When the fall area 703a is arranged in the game area PE outside the variable winning device 32, the fall area 703a may be always open without providing the opening / closing means for opening and closing the fall area 703a.

Further, when the fall area 703a is arranged in the game area PE outside the variable winning device 32, the game area PE may be provided with opening / closing means for opening and closing the fall area 703a. In this case, in order to give the impression that the game ball does not easily pass through the fall area 703a, the opening width (width dimension of the ball entry port) of the opening / closing means provided corresponding to the fall area 703a is the opening width of the variable winning device 32 (the opening width of the variable winning device 32). It is preferable to make it smaller than the width dimension of the large winning opening 32a).

The fall area 703a and its opening / closing means may be arranged on either the upstream side or the downstream side of the variable winning device 32, but when arranged on the upstream side, the game ball (opening / closing means) that did not pass through the fall area 703a. The game ball whose passage is restricted by the above means that the variable winning device 32 can be reached, while the game ball that has passed through the fall area 703a cannot reach the variable winning device 32. Allows the game ball that has passed through the variable winning device 32 without winning the variable winning device 32 to reach the fall area 703a or the arrangement area of the opening / closing means thereof, while the game ball that has won the variable winning device 32 has the fall area 703a or It is preferable that the opening / closing means cannot be reached.

(38) In the third embodiment, the shutter 706 (falling area 703a) is switched to the open state in the final round, but is switched to the open state in rounds other than the final round. May be good. Further, in the third embodiment, the shutter 706 is switched to the open state in one round in the open / close execution mode, but the shutter 706 may be switched to the open state in two or more rounds. .. The same applies to the cases where the fall area 703a or the opening / closing means thereof is provided in the game area PE in the above (36) and (37).

(39) In the third embodiment, the shutter 706 (falling area 703a) is switched to the open state at the timing when the upper limit winning number of winnings occurs in the variable winning device 32, but the shutter 706 is opened. Timing is not limited to this. For example, the shutter 706 may be opened in the middle of the round game (for example, at the timing when a predetermined number of winnings less than the maximum winning number occurs). In this case, the shutter 706 is opened during the period in which the variable winning device 32 is in the open state, and it is possible to give a game that encourages whether or not the game ball passes through the fall area 703a during the round game. It will be possible. Further, as a configuration in which the shutter 706 is opened while the variable winning device 32 is open, the elapsed period from the start of the round start or the open / close execution mode reaches a predetermined period, or the round start or the open / close execution mode is started. The shutter 706 may be switched to the open state based on the number of times the variable winning device 32 is opened reaches a predetermined number of times.

At that time, the opening period of the shutter 706 may be shorter than the opening period in which the variable winning device 32 can be opened in one round or the opening period in which the variable winning device 32 can be opened in one opening. If the shutter 706 (falling area 703a) is open for the entire or most of the opening period of the variable winning device 32, the period during which the player can aim at the variable winning device 32 with peace of mind cannot be secured, and the game ball is placed on the variable winning device 32. This is because it is difficult to balance with the game of winning a prize and winning a prize ball. If the variable winning device 32 is opened a plurality of times in one round and the opening times of the respective openings are not equal (at least one opening is different from the other opening), it is not necessarily the case of any opening. It is not necessary that the opening time of the shutter 706 is shorter than the opening time, and the opening time of the shutter 706 may be shorter than at least the longest opening time.

This modification can also be applied to the case where the fall area 703a or the opening / closing means thereof is provided in the game area PE in the above (36) and (37).

(40) In the third embodiment, the shutter 706 is switched to the open state when the game ball passes through the passing portion (winning sensor 702) provided in the variable winning device 32. The shutter 706 may be switched to the open state when the game ball passes through the passing portion provided in the game area PE outside the variable winning device 32. This also applies to the case where the fall area 703a or the opening / closing means thereof is provided in the game area PE in the above (36) and (37).

In the above case, it is preferable that the game ball that has passed through the passing portion is not guided to the rear of the game board 24a and flows down the game area PE even after passing. Further, a passing portion outside the variable winning device 32 is arranged on the upstream side or the downstream side of the variable winning device 32, and a game ball launched with a strength that can reach the variable winning device 32 can reach the passing portion. It is good to say. Further, instead of the variable winning device 32, it is arranged on the upstream side or the downstream side of another winning section (for example, the general winning opening 31) to which the winning ball is paid out when the winning is generated, and the strength that can reach the other winning section The game ball launched in the above may be configured to reach the passing portion. In consideration of the flow of the game in which the opening / closing means is opened by passing through the passing portion, the passing portion is preferably arranged in the fall area 703a or the upstream side of the opening / closing means.

(41) In the third embodiment, the shutter 706 is switched to the open state when the game ball passes through the passing portion (detection area of the winning sensor 702). However, a predetermined lottery process is performed. The shutter 706 may be switched to the open state based on the winning. This also applies to the case where the fall area 703a or the opening / closing means thereof is provided in the game area PE in the above (36) and (37).

In the above case, in order to avoid confusion among the players, the lottery process for opening and closing the shutter 706 may be executed separately from the lottery process (transition determination) for opening and closing the variable winning device 32. In this case, it is preferable to notify the player of the result of the lottery process for opening and closing the shutter 706. In this case, the notification may be performed on the display unit (display unit G of the special figure display unit or the symbol display device 41) that notifies the result of the transition determination, or may be performed by another display unit. The latter configuration is preferable in order to distinguish it from the transition determination notification.

(42) In the third embodiment, the lottery process (fall lottery) for whether or not to shift the gaming state to the time-saving gaming state or the normal gaming state is performed when the gaming ball passes through the fall area 703a. When it is executed and the result of the lottery is a winning result, it may be configured to shift to a time-saving gaming state or a normal gaming state. For example, in the configuration in which the game ball falls immediately after passing through the fall region 703a as in the third embodiment, if the fall occurs too frequently, the game motivation may be discouraged. Therefore, the fall region 703a There is no choice but to suppress the passing frequency to some extent, and there is an aspect that the presence of the fall area 703a is diminished accordingly. In this respect, in this configuration, even if the game ball passes through the fall area 703a, it does not immediately fall, so that the frequency of the game ball passing through the fall area 703a can be increased. As a result, the opportunity for the player to pay attention to the fall area 703a is expanded, and the existence of the fall area 703a can be suitably appealed.

Further, when the number of passing game balls (passing number of times) in the fall area 703a from the start of the round game or the start of the open / close execution mode reaches a predetermined number of times, the game state is changed to the time-saving game state or the normal game. The configuration may be such that the state is changed or the lottery process is performed.

It should be noted that the fall area 703a is assumed to function not only as a direct trigger for a fall as in the third embodiment, but also as a trigger for a fall lottery as in this modification. It can also be called a lottery area. Further, this modification can also be applied to the case where the fall area 703a or the opening / closing means thereof is provided in the game area PE in the above (36) and (37).

(43) In the third embodiment, a lottery process for whether or not to release the shutter 706 is executed when the game ball passes through the passing portion (detection area of the winning sensor 702), and the result of the lottery. The shutter 706 may be opened when is the winning result. Further, the shutter 706 may be opened based on the number of passing game balls (passing times) to the passing portion from the start of the round game or the start of the open / close execution mode reaches a predetermined number of times. Good. The same applies to the cases where the fall area 703a or the opening / closing means thereof is provided in the game area PE in the above (36) and (37).

(44) In the third embodiment, the prize ball may be paid out based on the game ball passing through the fall area 703a. This also applies to the case where the fall area 703a or the opening / closing means thereof is provided in the game area PE in the above (36) and (37).

(45) In the third embodiment, the shutter 706 is opened only once based on the trigger of 1, but the shutter 706 may be opened a plurality of times based on the trigger of 1. This also applies to the case where the fall area 703a or the opening / closing means thereof is provided in the game area PE in the above (36) and (37).

In the above case, it is preferable that the short-term opening having a relatively short opening period is executed at least once, and then the long-term opening having a relatively long opening period is executed at least once. This is because the player's attention to the fall area 703a can be attracted by utilizing the above short-term opening as a suggestion or a guideline that the game ball can easily pass through the fall area 703a. In this case, the opening period for one time in the short-term opening may be shorter than the firing cycle (0.6 sec) of the game ball in order to prevent the game ball from passing through the fall area 703a during the execution of the opening. .. Further, both the short-term opening and the long-term opening may be shorter than the opening period of the variable winning device 32 for one round or one time as described in (39) above.

(46) In the third embodiment, in the case of a specific jackpot, the game ball does not fall even if it passes through the fall area 703a, the lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, and other specifics. In the case of a big hit, the lottery mode may be configured to fall to the low probability mode when the game ball passes through the fall area 703a. For example, the above specific jackpot is the first hit (the jackpot won under normal gaming conditions), and the other specific jackpot is the jackpot in the consecutive villas (the jackpot won under high probability mode or high frequency support mode). The configuration is conceivable. With such a configuration, the inconvenience that the lottery mode becomes the low probability mode without getting the chance to play in the high probability mode occurs even though the probability change jackpot is assigned at the first hit. It becomes possible to suppress it suitably.

In this case, a jackpot type table for the first special figure (for the starting winning opening that wins by hitting left) and a jackpot type table for the second special drawing (for the starting opening that wins by hitting right) are provided separately. The former jackpot type table defines the probability variation jackpot result and the normal jackpot result (non-probability variation jackpot result), while the latter jackpot type table defines only the probability variation jackpot result (in other words, the jackpot). The result may be configured (there is no distinction between probabilistic and non-probable changes). According to such a configuration, by winning the probability variation jackpot at the first hit (big hit under the left-handed game state), the player shifts to the high-probability mode, and in the high-probability mode (right-handed game state), As long as the game ball does not pass through the fall area 703a, it is possible to realize the game property in which the high probability mode continues. The same applies to the case where the fall area 703a or the opening / closing means thereof is provided in the game area PE in the above (36) and (37).

(47) In the third embodiment, a first variable winning device not provided with a fall area 703a and a second variable winning device provided with a falling area 703a may be provided. In this case, as the mode of opening / closing execution mode, there are a plurality of types of modes including a first mode in which the first variable winning device is controlled to open / close and a second mode in which the second variable winning device is controlled to open / close. The opening / closing execution mode of any of these modes may be executed by the distribution of. Further, in the case of the first hit (in the case of the big hit in the first special figure), the opening / closing execution mode (opening / closing execution mode not including the round in which the second variable winning device is controlled to open / close) is executed only in the first aspect, and the series is continued. In the case of a jackpot in the villa (in the case of a jackpot in the second special figure), an opening / closing execution mode containing only the second aspect or an opening / closing execution mode including the second aspect (including a round in which the second variable winning device is controlled to open / close). It may be configured to execute the open / close execution mode).

(48) In the third embodiment, a passage portion for guiding the game ball that has passed through the detection region (first region) of the winning sensor 702 to the fall region 703a (second region) is formed by a continuous wall extending in the vertical direction. However, at least a part of the passage portion may be formed by a game nail. However, in this case, the moving speed of the game ball varies, and the passing ball in the first region that triggered the opening of the shutter 706 passes through the second region in relation to the period during which the shutter 706 is opened. It may or may not be done, and it is assumed that the behavior will be unstable. In view of this point, it is preferable that the entire passage portion is composed of a continuous wall as in the third embodiment. In this case, as a result of suppressing variations in the moving speed of the game ball, the time required for the game ball that has passed through the first region to reach the second region can be stabilized, which triggers the opening of the shutter 706. It is possible to construct a configuration in which the passing sphere of the first region stably passes through the second region.

(49) In the third embodiment, the game ball moving in the passage portion (right vertical passage portion 850) through which the game ball passing through the detection region (first region) of the winning sensor 702 passes. It may be configured to include means capable of reducing the moving speed or stopping the game ball in the passage portion. For example, as shown in FIG. 58, a plurality of projecting portions 851 projecting inward of the right vertical passage portion 850 are formed on the inner wall surface portion of the right vertical passage portion 850. These protrusions 851 are arranged along the moving direction of the game ball, and each protrusion 851 is formed so as to extend in the passage width direction of the right vertical passage portion 850. The protruding portions 851 are dispersed in the front-rear or left-right directions on the inner wall surface portion of the right vertical passage portion 850, and are arranged so as to be positioned alternately.

When the game ball that has entered the right entrance portion 504 passes through the first region, the game ball comes into contact with each protrusion 851, whereby the moving speed of the game ball is reduced. Further, as shown in FIG. 58 (b), since the meandering route 852 is formed by each of the protruding portions 851, the moving distance until the game ball passing through the first region reaches the fall region 703a (second region). Is longer than the linear distance L between the first region and the second region. As a result, the time required for the game ball that has passed through the first region to reach the second region becomes longer, and the passing ball in the first region that triggered the opening of the shutter 706 is stably passed through the second region. Can be made to. In this case, since the straight line distance L can be shortened, it becomes easy to compactly organize the passage structure on the back side of the variable winning device 32, and it is possible to make a suitable configuration in a game machine in which the installation area of the game parts is limited.

Since a certain amount of deceleration is expected due to contact with each of the protruding portions 851, each protruding portion 851 may be provided in a manner in which the meandering route 852 is not formed.

(50) The variable winning device 32 according to the third embodiment may be configured to include the passage structure 860 shown in FIG. 59. The passage structure 860 is arranged behind the passage portion 502 (FIG. 7A) so as to communicate with the passage portion 502, and the game ball that has entered the right entrance portion 504 flows into the passage structure 860. In the passage structure 860, a first passage portion 861 in which the winning sensor 702 is arranged, a second passage portion 862 in which the game ball passing through the detection region (first region) of the winning sensor 702 is guided, and a second passage portion A third passage portion 863, which is provided on the downstream side of the 862 and in which the V winning sensor 705 is arranged, is provided. The second passage portion 862 extends in the lateral direction (left-right direction of the game machine), and the bottom portion 862a is formed with an opening 864 that opens downward. A fall winning sensor 703 is arranged below the opening 864, and a fall region 703a (second region) is formed.

A shutter 865 is arranged above the fall winning sensor 703 so that the opening 864 can be closed. The shutter 865 is held in a state in which the pachinko machine 10 can be slid and moved in the front-rear direction. That is, the shutter 865 can be displaced to a protruding position (closed position) that protrudes forward to close the opening 864 and a retracted position (opening position) that retracts from the protruding position and opens the opening 864. ..

As shown in FIG. 59 (a), when the shutter 865 is arranged at the protruding position, the opening 864 is closed, and the shutter 865 constitutes the bottom 862a of the second passage portion 862 in the opening 864. , The game ball from the first passage portion 861 moves on the shutter 865. As a result, the game ball from the first passage portion 861 is guided to the third passage portion 863 and can pass through the detection area of the V winning sensor 705. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 59B, when the shutter 865 is arranged at the retracted position, the opening 864 is opened and the game ball from the first passage 861 passes through the second passage 862. It falls down with. As a result, the game ball from the first passage portion 861 is guided to the fall winning sensor 703 side, and can pass through the fall area 703a.

Further, the shutter 865 is connected to the drive unit 707 like the shutter 706 according to the third embodiment, is usually arranged at a protruding position (closed position), and has a predetermined switching timing (for example, opening / closing execution). At the timing when the upper limit winning number of winnings occurs in the final round in the mode), the drive is controlled so as to be displaced to the backward position (open position).

In the above configuration, since the game ball that has passed through the first region is guided to the second passage portion 862 that extends in the lateral direction, the game ball is compared to the case where the game ball falls in the right vertical passage portion 701 that extends in the vertical direction. The movement speed can be made slow. Then, the bottom portion 862a of the second passage portion 862 is opened and closed by the shutter 865, and the game ball is dropped downward to be guided to the second region. In this case, if the shutter 865 is displaced to the open position by the time the game ball from the first passage portion 861 reaches the downstream end portion 865b of the shutter 865, the game ball can be guided to the second region. The passing ball A in the first region, which triggered the opening of 865, can be passed through the second region with a margin. As a result, the passing ball A can be guided to the second region more stably, and it is possible to avoid the game ball passing through the second region after seeing that the game ball that triggers the opening has passed the first region. It becomes possible to more preferably suppress the act of trying.

Further, in the above configuration, a means capable of reducing the moving speed of the game ball moving on the upper surface portion 865a of the shutter 865 or stopping the game ball on the upper surface portion 865a may be provided. As such a configuration, a configuration in which a plurality of protrusions are provided on the upper surface portion 865a or on the inner wall surface portion of the second passage portion 862 can be considered. In such a configuration, depending on the degree of deceleration or stopping, not only the passing ball A that triggered the opening but also the passing ball before the passing ball A can be guided to the second region. As a result, even if the player tries to avoid passing through the second area after seeing that the game ball that triggers the opening has passed through the first area, it will not be in time, and such avoidance action will be more reliably suppressed. It becomes possible to do.

In the above configuration, the second passage portion 862 extends in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 10, but it may extend in the front-rear direction. Further, the shutter 865 is not limited to the one that slides and moves as long as the opening 864 can be opened and the bottom 862a can be formed in the closed state. For example, the shutter 865 can be rotated to open the opening. It may open and close the 864. Further, the second passage portion 862 does not necessarily have to be horizontal, and may be inclined downward toward the third passage portion 863 (V winning sensor 705).

(51) In the third embodiment, since the opening period (1 sec) of the shutter 706 is longer than the firing cycle (0.6 sec) of the game ball, the shutter 706 is opened after the passing ball that triggered the opening of the shutter 706. A passing ball that has passed through the first region (detection region of the winning sensor 702) can pass through the second region (falling region 703a), but is the second passing ball in the first region after the passing ball that triggered the opening. A configuration may be configured in which the passing ball that has passed through the first region is restricted from passing through the second region (it cannot pass or is difficult to pass). As such a configuration, it is conceivable that the opening period of the shutter 706 is shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball, or the shutter 706 is switched to the closed state on condition that the game ball has passed through the second region. .. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to more preferably suppress the capture act.

In each of the configurations (48) to (51), the game ball that has passed through the detection region (first region) of the winning sensor 702 in the fourth embodiment is detected in the detection region (1st region) of the high-accuracy V winning sensor 803. It can also be applied to the configuration leading to the second region). In this case, it is possible to suitably suppress the act of adjusting the launch mode of the game ball so that the game ball passes through the second area after seeing that the game ball that triggers the opening has passed through the first region. Become.

(52) In the fourth embodiment described above, the round continuation is given as the first privilege, and the transition to the high probability mode is given as the second privilege, but the first privilege and the second privilege are added to these. It is not limited. For example, the support mode may shift to the high-frequency support mode as the first privilege or the second privilege, a specific effect may be executed, or a predetermined number of prize balls may be paid out. In this case, the round continuation may be given as the first privilege, and the privilege other than the transition to the high probability mode may be given as the second privilege, or the privilege other than the round continuation may be given as the first privilege, and the second privilege. It may be configured to give a transition to the high probability mode.

(53) In the fourth embodiment, when the game ball passes through the high-accuracy V region 803a in the fifth round game, the fifth effect DR5 is executed in the tenth round game. , The first effect DR1 may be executed again. That is, the player may select which route to launch the game ball without notifying which route should be aimed at.

(54) In the fourth embodiment, when the game ball passes through the right entrance portion 504 in a round in which the shutter 865 is driven in a high distribution mode, the round is continued (first privilege) and the high probability mode is entered. Although the configuration is such that both the transition (second privilege) is granted, the configuration may be such that only the latter is granted.

(55) In the fourth embodiment, the high-accuracy V winning sensor 803, the second passage portion 804, the discharge sensor 805, the third passage portion 806, and the continuous V winning sensor 807 are omitted, and the left entrance portion 505 (the first). Under the first internal process (control process) that grants the first privilege based on the passage of the game ball through (1 area) and the first game situation (for example, during the execution of the fifth round game), the right side A second privilege is given based on the passage of the game ball through the entrance portion 504 (first area), and under the second game situation (for example, during the execution of the 10th round game), the right entrance portion 504 is used. The configuration may include a second internal process (control process) that prevents the first privilege and the second privilege from being granted even if the game ball passes through. That is, the configuration in which the mode of granting the privilege when the game ball passes through the second region changes depending on the game situation at the time of passing is not necessarily limited to that realized by the movement of the game ball, and the control inside the game machine. It may be realized by processing.

(56) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, for example, pachinko machines in which the electric accessory opens a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of the special device, or a game in a specific area of the special device. The present invention can also be applied to pachinko machines that generate a right when a ball enters and become a big hit, pachinko machines equipped with other accessories, arrange ball machines, and game machines such as sparrow balls.

In addition, a non-bullet type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction is provided, the reels are started to rotate by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. After the reels have stopped after a predetermined time has passed, if a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line that can be seen from the display window, a privilege such as a medal payout is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

Further, a pachinko machine and a slot machine equipped with a take-in device, in which a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are taken in by the take-in device and then the start lever is operated to start the rotation of the reel. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which and is fused.

<About the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiment>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing the effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in each of the above embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic A group>
Features A1. A transition determination means (a function of executing a hit / fail determination by the main control device 81) that executes a predetermined transition determination based on a predetermined determination trigger, and
When the result of the predetermined transition determination is a predetermined transition correspondence result, the special gaming state transition means for shifting the gaming state to a special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state (open / close execution mode). (Function to execute game state transition processing by the main control device 81) and
Variable ball entry means (variable winning device) that can switch between the first state in which the game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and the second state in which the game ball cannot enter or is more difficult to enter than the first state. 32) and
A switching control means (a function of executing a large winning opening opening / closing process by the main control device 81) that executes switching control for changing the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state and then changing to the second state. ,
With
The special gaming state is configured to be able to execute a round game in which the switching control is executed at least once a plurality of times.
When a specific number (upper limit winning number) of game balls enters the variable ball entering means during the execution of the round game, the round game ending means (large by the main control device 81) for ending the running round game. Equipped with a function to execute the winning opening opening / closing process)
The modes of the special game state include a first round game in which the specific number is the first number (8 pieces) (a first round game in the open / close execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result B). The second round game (the second round game in the open / close execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result B) in which the specific number is the second number (4 pieces) different from the first number is the special one. A gaming machine characterized in that aspects included in the gaming state are included.

In the above configuration, the result of the transition determination becomes the transition correspondence result, so that the player shifts to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and in the special gaming state, switching control is performed in which the variable ball entry means is set to the first state. The round game is executed multiple times. Further, in each round game, a specific number, which is a reference number for the end of the round game, is determined, and each round game ends when the number of game balls entered into the variable ball entry means becomes the specific number. ing. Under such a configuration, in one special game state, the first round game in which the specific number, which is the end condition of the round game, is the first number, and the second, in which the specific number is the second number. Round games are provided, and the specific number of each round game is diversified. For this reason, it becomes difficult for the player to understand the specific number of each round game, and it is possible to provide a game in which the specific number of each round game is predicted and enjoyed. As a result, the monotonization of the game during the special game state is suppressed, and it becomes possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature A2. When a predetermined condition (generation of V prize) is satisfied during the execution of the round game, a privilege granting means (step S615 by the main control device 81) capable of granting a privilege (continuation of the round or its right) to the player is satisfied. It has a function to execute the processing of
In the round game ending means, when the predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the round game or when the privilege is given by the privilege giving means, the number of balls entered into the variable ball entering means is specified. A feature characterized by being provided with means for ending the round game being executed (a function of executing the processing of steps S610 to S612 by the main control device 81) regardless of whether or not the number has been reached. The gaming machine described in A1.

In the above configuration, if a predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the round game, a privilege can be obtained, but even if the number of game balls entered into the variable ball entry means has not reached a specific number, the round game Is finished. That is, if the predetermined condition is satisfied at an early stage of the round game, the round game ends early. Therefore, when a predetermined condition is satisfied at the timing when a specific number of game balls enter the variable ball entry means or at a timing close to it, the player can obtain the privilege while continuing the round game for a long time. It will be ideal. In this case, since the specific number of each round game is diversified, it is not uniform which number of balls corresponds to the specific number, and the timing at which the ideal predetermined condition is satisfied fluctuates. It becomes a thing. Therefore, the game can be played with the expectation that a predetermined condition will be satisfied at an ideal timing, in addition to predicting a specific number. Therefore, each round game can be made much more interesting than the case where the round game is simply digested, and the game in the special game state can be greatly excited.

Feature A3. A2 feature A2, which is configured so that the special gaming state ends when the number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means reaches the specific number without satisfying the predetermined condition. The game machine described in.

In the above configuration, while the specific number of each round game is diversified, when a predetermined condition is satisfied at the timing when the specific number of game balls are entered into the variable ball entry means or at a timing close to that, the round game is played. While it is possible to continue the special game state (execute the next round game) while continuing for a long time, the special game state ends if the predetermined conditions are not satisfied by the time a specific number of balls are entered. A game can be given. As a result, it is possible to increase the fun of the game in which a specific number is predicted and a predetermined condition is satisfied at or near the timing of entering the ball corresponding to the prediction result, and the game in the special game state is greatly excited. Will be possible.

Feature A4. Equipped with an operating means (launch handle 60) that can be operated by the player
The gaming machine according to feature A2 or feature A3, wherein the predetermined condition can be satisfied based on the operation of the operating means.

According to the above configuration, since the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the operation of the player, the player can be involved in the timing of the establishment of the predetermined condition. As a result, it is possible to enhance the interest of each round game and to promote active participation in the game, as compared with the case of just checking whether or not the predetermined conditions are satisfied.

Feature A5. Equipped with a launching means (game ball launch mechanism 53) capable of launching a game ball based on a predetermined launch operation.
A specific area (detection area of the V winning sensor 507) is provided so that the game ball launched in a manner that can reach the variable ball entry means can be reached.
The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A4, characterized in that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the game ball passes through the specific area or reaches the specific area.

Under the special game state, the player launches the game ball aiming at the variable ball entry means.In this feature, a predetermined condition is satisfied according to the passage of the game ball to the specific area, and the specific condition is satisfied. Since the game ball launched in such a manner that the area can reach the variable ball entry means can be reached, the round game ends after the predetermined conditions are satisfied and the privilege is obtained. In some cases, the round game ends without the conditions being met, and it is possible to pay attention to whether or not the predetermined conditions should be met in relation to the prize balls corresponding to the remaining number up to a specific number and the privilege. As a result, it becomes possible to excite the game in the special game state as compared with the case where the special game state is simply digested.

Feature A6. The specific area is provided in the variable ball entry means.
The game machine according to feature A5, wherein the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means is configured to be reachable in the specific area.

According to the above configuration, the points of interest of the player are aggregated, and whether or not the game ball has entered the variable ball entry means and whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied (whether or not the game ball has passed through a specific area). ) And both can be visually recognized without moving the line of sight. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from entering the variable ball entry means and overlooking whether or not the game ball has passed through the specific area, and the player can easily play the game.

Feature A7. The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A6, wherein the predetermined condition can be satisfied by a predetermined ball entry into the variable ball entry means.

Under the special game state, the player usually shoots the game ball aiming at the variable ball entry means, so that the round game ends after the predetermined condition is satisfied and the privilege is obtained. In some cases, the round game may end without the conditions being met, and it is possible to pay attention to whether or not the predetermined conditions should be met in relation to the prize balls corresponding to the remaining number up to a specific number and the privilege. As a result, it becomes possible to excite the game in the special game state as compared with the case where the special game state is simply digested.

Feature A8. Equipped with a launching means (game ball launch mechanism 53) capable of launching a game ball based on a predetermined launch operation.
When the game ball launched by the launching means passes through a specific area (detection area of the V winning sensor 507) or reaches the specific area, the predetermined condition is satisfied.
When the game ball is launched by the first launch operation (the operation of launching the game ball with the strength to enter the right entrance portion 504), the game ball can reach or easily reach the specific area, and the first launch operation When the game ball is launched by a second launch operation (an operation of launching the game ball with a strength that enters the left entrance portion 505), the game ball cannot reach the specific area or the first launch operation The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A7, which is configured to be harder to reach.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not to pass the game ball through the specific area, so that the player can determine the timing at which the predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to realize a game in which the player predicts a specific number and generates a predetermined condition by himself / herself at a timing corresponding to the prediction result. In this case, if the continuation of the round is prioritized and the predetermined conditions are satisfied at an early timing, the total number of prize balls obtained can be suppressed even if the special game state can be completed. On the other hand, if the timing for establishing the predetermined condition is extended to the limit in order to increase the number of prize balls in the round game for one round, the special game state will end in the middle. That is, it is possible to provide a so-called chicken race-like playability in which courage is tested after predicting a specific number of games in each round. As a result, the fun of predicting a specific number of games in each round and playing the game is suitably enhanced, and it is possible to greatly improve the interest of the special game state.

Feature A9. The gaming machine according to feature A8, which comprises a guiding means (guidance passage portion 401) for guiding the gaming ball launched by the first launch operation to the specific area.

According to the above configuration, the launched game balls can be stably guided to a specific area, so that the player can perform a game in which a specific number is predicted and the timing at which a predetermined condition is satisfied is adjusted. It becomes possible to easily satisfy a predetermined condition at a target timing.

Feature A10. It is configured so that the game ball can reach the variable ball entry means in both the case where the game ball is launched by the first launch operation and the case where the game ball is launched by the second launch operation. The gaming machine according to feature A8 or feature A9, which is characterized by being

According to the above configuration, it is possible to switch between passing the game ball through the specific area and not passing it while the game ball is inserted into the variable ball entry means. That is, in adjusting the timing at which the predetermined condition is satisfied, it is possible to preferably suppress that the original game of the special game state is impaired, such as a decrease in the ball entry rate to the variable ball entry means. Therefore, the game in the special game state and the game in which a specific number is predicted and the timing at which a predetermined condition is established can be adjusted can be suitably compatible with each other, and the configuration is suitable for enlivening the game in the special game state. Can be done.

Feature A11. In the variable ball entry means, a first region as the specific region and a second region (detection region of the winning sensor 509) different from the first region are provided.
A game ball launched by the first launch operation can enter the variable ball entry means and can pass through the first region or reach the first region, and is launched by the second launch operation. The ball can enter the variable ball entry means and pass through the second region or reach the second region.
The feature A10 according to feature A10, wherein the game ball that has passed through the second region or has reached the second region is configured so as not to pass through the first region or reach the first region. Amusement machine.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to make it a preferable mode for adjusting the timing at which a predetermined condition is satisfied while inserting the game ball into the variable ball entry means. Moreover, by consolidating the points of interest, it is possible to prevent the player from entering the variable ball entry means and overlooking whether the game ball has passed through the first region (specific region), so that the player can easily play the game. Can be done.

Feature A12. The variable ball entry means includes a ball entry portion (large winning opening 32a) into which a game ball can enter when the variable ball entry means is at least in the first state.
The ball entry portion has a horizontally long shape.
A first entrance portion (right side entrance portion 504) communicating with the first region is provided on one side of the ball entry portion in the left-right direction of the game machine, and a second entrance portion communicating with the second region is provided on the other side. There is an entrance (left entrance 505),
The gaming machine according to feature A11, wherein a partition portion (partition portion 511) is provided between the first entrance portion and the second entrance portion.

According to the above configuration, the ball entry portion of the variable ball entry means is horizontally long, and the first entrance portion and the second entrance portion are provided on both the left and right sides thereof, so that the first region and the second region are separated. Will be easier to do. Further, since the partition portion is provided between the first entrance portion and the second entrance portion, it is possible to prevent the game ball from moving to the opposite entrance portion in the ball entry portion. As a result, the occurrence of the inconvenience that the game ball passes through the second region is suppressed even though the first launch operation is performed aiming at the first region, and the timing at which the predetermined condition is satisfied is determined by the launch operation of the player. It can be a preferred embodiment for making it adjustable.

Feature A13. One of the features A1 to A12 characterized in that the specific number of the round games that can be executed in the special game state can be prevented from being notified for at least one of the round games. Described game machine.

According to the above configuration, in combination with the fact that the specific number of each round game is diversified, the specific number of each round game can be configured to be unrecognizable or difficult for the player to recognize, and the specific number can be recognized. It becomes possible to complement the game that predicts.

Feature A14. As the mode of the special gaming state, the first mode including the first round game and the second round game (opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result B) and the first mode are different from each other. A plurality of types of modes including the first round game and the second mode including the second round game (open / close execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result C) are provided.
When the result of the predetermined transition determination is a predetermined transition correspondence result, the special gaming state transition means changes to the special gaming state of any one of the plurality of types of the special gaming states. Equipped with a means to shift (a function to execute the setting process for each round by the main controller 81)
The special gaming state of the first aspect and the special gaming state of the second aspect are characterized in that the specific number in the round game of a predetermined round (second round) is different. The gaming machine described in either.

In the above configuration, even in the round games of the same round, the specific number differs depending on the mode of the special game state, so that it becomes more difficult for the player to understand the specific number of each round game, and the specific number of each round game is predicted. It becomes possible to enhance the fun of doing.

Feature A15. A transition determination means (a function of executing a hit / fail determination by the main control device 81) that executes a predetermined transition determination based on a predetermined determination trigger, and
When the result of the predetermined transition determination is a predetermined transition correspondence result, the special gaming state transition means for shifting the gaming state to a special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state (open / close execution mode). (Function to execute game state transition processing by the main control device 81) and
Variable ball entry means (variable winning device) that can switch between the first state in which the game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and the second state in which the game ball cannot enter or is more difficult to enter than the first state. 32) and
A switching control means (a function of executing a large winning opening opening / closing process by the main control device 81) that executes switching control for changing the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state and then changing to the second state. ,
With
The special gaming state is configured to be able to execute a round game in which the switching control is executed at least once a plurality of times.
When a specific number (upper limit winning number) of game balls enters the variable ball entering means during the execution of the round game, the round game ending means (large by the main control device 81) for ending the running round game. Equipped with a function to execute the winning opening opening / closing process)
The aspect of the special gaming state includes a first aspect (opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result B) and a second aspect different from the first aspect (opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result C). There are multiple types of aspects,
When the result of the predetermined transition determination is a predetermined transition correspondence result, the special gaming state transition means changes to the special gaming state of any one of the plurality of types of the special gaming states. Equipped with a means to shift (a function to execute the setting process for each round by the main controller 81)
The special gaming state of the first aspect and the special gaming state of the second aspect are characterized in that the specific number in the round game of a predetermined round (second round) is different. ..

In the above configuration, the result of the transition determination becomes the transition correspondence result, so that the player shifts to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and in the special gaming state, switching control is performed in which the variable ball entry means is set to the first state. The round game is executed multiple times. Further, in each round game, a specific number, which is a reference number for the end of the round game, is determined, and each round game ends when the number of game balls entered into the variable ball entry means becomes the specific number. ing. Under such a configuration, a plurality of types of modes are provided as modes of the special game state, and even in the round game of the same round, the specific number differs depending on the mode of the special game state. For this reason, it becomes difficult for the player to understand the specific number of each round game, and it is possible to provide a game in which the specific number of each round game is predicted and enjoyed. As a result, the monotonization of the game during the special game state is suppressed, and it becomes possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

It is possible to apply each configuration described in any of the above features A1 to A14 to this feature. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying these configurations.

Feature A16. A transition determination means (a function of executing a hit / fail determination by the main control device 81) that executes a predetermined transition determination based on a predetermined determination trigger, and
When the result of the predetermined transition determination is a predetermined transition correspondence result, the special gaming state transition means for shifting the gaming state to a special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state (open / close execution mode). (Function to execute game state transition processing by the main control device 81) and
Variable ball entry means (variable winning device) that can switch between the first state in which the game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and the second state in which the game ball cannot enter or is more difficult to enter than the first state. 32) and
A switching control means (a function of executing a large winning opening opening / closing process by the main control device 81) that executes switching control for changing the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state and then changing to the second state. ,
With
The special gaming state is configured to be able to execute a round game in which the switching control is executed at least once a plurality of times.
When a specific number (upper limit winning number) of game balls enters the variable ball entering means during the execution of the round game, the round game ending means (large by the main control device 81) for ending the running round game. Function to execute the winning opening opening / closing process) and
A specific number setting means for setting the specific number (a function of executing the setting process for each round by the main control device 81) and
With
The round game end means ends the running round game when the number of game balls entered into the variable ball entry means reaches the specific number set by the specific number setting means. ,
The specific number setting means
The first means for setting the first number (8 pieces) as the specific number, and
A second means for setting a second number (4 pieces) different from the first number as the specific number, and
A game machine characterized by being equipped with.

In the above configuration, the result of the transition determination becomes the transition correspondence result, so that the player shifts to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and in the special gaming state, switching control is performed in which the variable ball entry means is set to the first state. The round game is executed multiple times. Further, in each round game, a specific number, which is a reference number for the end of the round game, is determined, and each round game ends when the number of game balls entered into the variable ball entry means becomes the specific number. ing. Under such a configuration, the specific number of each round game may be set to the first number, or the specific number of each round game may be set to a second number different from the first number. Has been transformed. For this reason, it becomes difficult for the player to understand the specific number of each round game, and it is possible to provide a game in which the specific number of each round game is predicted and enjoyed. As a result, the monotonization of the game during the special game state is suppressed, and it becomes possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

It is possible to apply each configuration described in any of the above features A1 to A14 to this feature. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying these configurations.

The invention described in the above features A1 to A16 states, "For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, when a lottery process is executed based on a predetermined lottery opportunity and the lottery result becomes a specific result, Regarding the background technology that shifts to a special gaming state that is more advantageous for the player than the normal gaming state (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-81853), "Here, in the gaming machine, to the game There is still room for improvement in raising the degree of attention of the ”, which was made with the problem to be solved.

It should be noted that, for each configuration of the above features A1 to A16, the technical configuration shown by any one of features A1 to A16, features B1 to B17, features C1 to C20, features D1 to D13, and features E1 to E12 is shown. It is possible to apply each idea individually, or it is possible to apply a part or all of each technical idea in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic B group>
Feature B1. A transition determination means (a function of executing a hit / fail determination by the main control device 81) that executes a predetermined transition determination based on a predetermined determination trigger, and
When the result of the predetermined transition determination is a predetermined transition correspondence result, the special gaming state transition means for shifting the gaming state to a special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state (open / close execution mode). (Function to execute game state transition processing by the main control device 81) and
Variable ball entry means (variable winning device) that can switch between the first state in which the game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and the second state in which the game ball cannot enter or is more difficult to enter than the first state. 32) and
A switching control means (a function of executing a large winning opening opening / closing process by the main control device 81) that executes switching control for changing the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state and then changing to the second state. ,
With
The special gaming state is configured to be able to execute a round game in which the switching control is executed at least once a plurality of times.
When a specific number (upper limit winning number) of game balls enters the variable ball entering means during the execution of the round game, the round game ending means (large by the main control device 81) for ending the running round game. Function to execute the winning opening opening / closing process) and
A specific number setting means for setting the specific number (a function of executing the setting process for each round by the main control device 81) and
With
The specific number setting means
The first means for setting the first number (8 pieces) as the specific number, and
A second means for setting a second number (4 pieces) different from the first number as the specific number, and
With
The feature is that it is possible to execute a specific notification (hit symbol, effect DR4 for success round) that is set by the specific number setting means or that allows the player to recognize the specific number. A game machine to play.

In this configuration, the result of the transition determination becomes the transition correspondence result, so that the player shifts to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and in the special gaming state, switching control is performed in which the variable ball entry means is set to the first state. The round game is executed multiple times. Further, in each round game, a specific number, which is a reference number for the end of the round game, is determined, and each round game ends when the number of game balls entered into the variable ball entry means becomes the specific number. ing. Under such a configuration, the specific number of each round game may be set to the first number, or the specific number of each round game may be set to a second number different from the first number. Has been transformed. As a result, the monotonization of the game during the special game state is suppressed, and it becomes possible to increase the degree of attention to the game. Further, since the specific notification that can be recognized by the player is performed, it is possible to preferably suppress the confusion of the player due to the fact that the specific number is not uniform.

Feature B2. A predetermined display means, in which the variable display of the pattern is started based on the shift determination being performed by the shift determination means, and the stop result corresponding to the result of the transition determination is stopped and displayed as one game time. (Special figure display unit 43, symbol display device 41) is provided with a game turn control means (a function of executing the special figure game turn control process by the main control device 81) so that the game turn is executed.
As the stop result corresponding to the transition correspondence result, there are a plurality of types of migration correspondence stop results (winning symbols).
The specific number setting means is the type of the transition correspondence stop result that is stopped displayed or stopped displayed on the predetermined display means, or the transition corresponding stop that is stopped displayed or stopped displayed on the predetermined display means. The specific number is set in correspondence with the predetermined information (big hit type counter C2) used to determine the type of result.
The gaming machine according to feature B1, characterized in that the specific notification is executed by the stop display of the transition correspondence stop result.

In the above configuration, the specific number is not notified directly, but is limited to indirect notification using the transition response stop result. For this reason, it is not possible for anyone to easily find out the specific number of games, and it is possible to preferably suppress that the games to be enjoyed by predicting the specific number of each round game are excessively hindered. In particular, it is possible to determine the specific number from the stop result only when the player knows all the correspondence between the type of stop result and the specific number of each round game. It will be an opportunity to deepen the interest and knowledge of this game machine, which in turn will lead to arousing the motivation to play.

In addition, such a configuration can effectively function as a countermeasure against fraud. For example, when a fraudulent act such as operating a game machine with a specific number different from the normally set specific number is performed, an employee of the game hall visually recognizes a stop result in a predetermined display means. It is possible to determine a specific number of discrepancies. Therefore, it can contribute to the early detection of fraudulent activity.

Feature B3. In the specific number setting means, when the stop display or the stop display of the transition correspondence stop result is the first transition correspondence stop result (stop result B), or the predetermined information is the first transition correspondence stop result. In the case of the first predetermined information (the jackpot type counter C2 which is a value of any of "20" to "59") corresponding to, the specific number in the round game of the predetermined round (second round) is When the number is the first, and the stop display or the stop display of the transition correspondence stop result is a second transition correspondence stop result (stop result C) different from the first transition correspondence stop result, or the predetermined When the information is the second predetermined information (the jackpot type counter which is a value of any one of "60" to "69") corresponding to the second transition correspondence stop result, in the round game of the predetermined round. The gaming machine according to feature B2, wherein the specific number is the second number.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to make the transition correspondence stop result stopped and displayed on the predetermined display means correspond to the upper limit winning number of each round game, and the stop display of the transition correspondence stop result appropriately functions as a specific notification. It becomes possible to let.

Feature B4. The gaming machine according to feature B3, which has at least a plurality of types of stop results having different display modes as the stop result corresponding to the first transition.

According to the above configuration, since the first number as the specific number and the first transition correspondence stop result correspond in a one-to-many relationship, it is difficult to determine the specific number (first number) from the first transition correspondence stop result. The degree can be increased. As a result, it is possible to suppress the ease of determining the specific number of stop results, and it is possible to preferably secure the games to be enjoyed by predicting the specific number of each round game.

It should be noted that this feature is described as "the first stop result of the first transition has a plurality of types of first stop results having different display modes, and the stop result of the second transition corresponds to the first stop result of the plurality of types. It is characterized in that it does not overlap and has a plurality of types of second stop results having different display modes. " In this configuration, even in the second transition support stop result, the specific number and the transition support stop result correspond in a one-to-many relationship, so that it is possible to further increase the difficulty of distinguishing the specific number from the transition support stop result. .. In addition, since the various stop results that result in the stoppage for the second transition and the various stop results that result in the stoppage for the first transition do not overlap, the employees of the game hall cannot determine the specific number from the stop results at all. Can be suppressed, and the diversification of suspension results can be suppressed from hindering fraud detection.

Feature B5. A second display means (symbol display device 41), which is provided separately from the predetermined display means (special drawing display unit 43) and has a larger display area than the predetermined display means,
A display control means (effect control) that controls the second display means so that the second display means variably displays a second pattern different from the pattern and stops and displays the stop result corresponding to the result of the transition determination. The function of controlling the variable display of the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 by the device 82 and the display control device 212), and
With
The display control means includes a case where the specific number in the round game of the predetermined round (second round) becomes the first number, and the specific number in the round game of the predetermined round (second round). The gaming machine according to feature B3 or B4, wherein the second number is provided with a means capable of displaying the same stop result as the stop result of the second pattern.

Since the second display means has a larger display area than the predetermined display means, it is assumed that a general player tends to pay more attention to the second display means than the predetermined display means. Under such a configuration, the stop result and the specific number can be associated with each other in the predetermined display means, and the stop result not corresponding to the specific number can be displayed in the second display means. For employees and skilled players, the specific number can be determined from the stop result of the predetermined display means, while for general players who are playing exclusively focusing on the second display means, the specific number can be determined from the stop result. Can be made difficult to distinguish. This makes it possible to optimally harmonize the measures against fraud and the game to be enjoyed by predicting a specific number.

Feature B6. It is characterized in that it is provided with a notification execution means (a function of executing a round start process by the effect control device 82) for executing the specific notification (effect DR4 for success round) when a predetermined predetermined condition is satisfied. Features The gaming machine according to any one of B1 to B5.

In the above configuration, since the specific notification is executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied, there are cases where the specific number of each round game is notified and cases where the specific notification is not notified. This makes it possible to provide a game in which a specific number of each round game is predicted and enjoyed while suppressing confusion of the player due to the diversification of the specific number.

When this feature is applied to any of the features B2 to B5, "as the specific notification, the first specific notification (hit symbol) and the player can use the specific number of the specific notifications rather than the first specific notification. It is possible to execute the second specific notification (effect DR4 for success round) that is easy to recognize, and at least the stop display of the transition correspondence stop result can be the first specific notification. " It can also be expressed as "the notification executing means executes the second specific notification when a predetermined predetermined condition is satisfied". This also applies to the following features B7 to B15.

Feature B7. The gaming machine according to feature B6, wherein the predetermined condition can be satisfied in the special gaming state.

According to the above configuration, not only a game in which a game ball is inserted into a variable ball entry means to obtain a prize ball in a special game state, but also a game in which a predetermined condition is satisfied and a specific notification is executed in the special game state. Can be granted. As a result, it is possible to provide a game that does not stop at simply inserting the game ball into the variable ball entry means, and it is possible to suppress the monotonization of the game during the special game state.

Feature B8. The predetermined condition is a specific event (lottery process executed by entering a ball) based on the entry of a game ball into the variable entry means (V winning) or based on the entry of a game ball into the variable entry means. The gaming machine according to feature B7, which can be established based on the occurrence of (such as the result of winning).

According to the above configuration, a predetermined condition can be satisfied while the game ball is inserted into the variable ball entry means while playing the special game state. Therefore, a game in which a game ball is inserted into the variable ball entry means and a game in which a predetermined condition is satisfied and specific notification is executed can be suitably compatible with each other, and it is practical to realize the configuration of the above feature B7. It can be a preferred embodiment.

Feature B9. A specific area (detection area of the V winning sensor 507) through which the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means can pass is provided in the variable ball entry means.
The predetermined condition is that the specific number of game balls among the game balls that have entered the variable ball entry means in the round game pass through the specific area, or the specific number of game balls are said to be said. The gaming machine according to feature B8, which is established based on passing through a specific area.

Since the specific number of each round game is diversified, it is not easy to pass the specific number of game balls to the specific area, and it is possible to increase the difficulty of satisfying the predetermined condition. For example, if the difficulty of satisfying a predetermined condition is low and the notification is easy to carry out, the significance of diversifying a specific number and making the player predict it may be lost. In this respect, in this configuration, since the difficulty level is increased, the situation where the notification is not achieved occurs with a certain frequency, and the configuration in which the specific number is diversified and the configuration in which the specific number is notified are preferably used. It becomes possible to harmonize.

Feature B10. A predetermined display means, in which the variable display of the pattern is started based on the shift determination being performed by the shift determination means, and the stop result corresponding to the result of the transition determination is stopped and displayed as one game time. (Special figure display unit 43, symbol display device 41) is provided with a game turn control means (a function of executing the special figure game turn control process by the main control device 81) so that the game turn is executed.
As the stop result, the transition support stop result (winning symbol) corresponding to the transition support result includes the first transition support stop result (first stop result) and the second transition support different from the first transition support stop result. Multiple types including the stop result (second stop result) are set,
When the first transition correspondence stop result is stopped or displayed as the stop result, the notification executing means executes the specific notification, and the second transition correspondence stop result is stopped as the stop result. The gaming machine according to feature B6, which comprises means for preventing the specific notification from being executed when the specific notification is displayed or stopped.

According to the above configuration, the specific notification is executed and the player can know the specific number of each round game depending on the stop result when the result of the transition determination is the transition correspondence result, and the specific notification is executed. Instead, there are cases where the player has no choice but to predict a specific number of games in each round. Therefore, in the game before the transition to the special gaming state, it is possible to play with the aim of displaying the stop result corresponding to the first transition as a stop, and not only the special gaming state but also the game before the transition to the special gaming state. It will be possible to enhance the interest of.

Feature B11. The gaming machine according to any one of features B6 to B10, wherein the notification executing means includes means for executing the specific notification in the special gaming state.

In the above configuration, while the specific number of each round game is diversified, the specific number of each round game is notified in real time, so that it is possible to perform useful notification for the player, and interest in the specific notification. It becomes possible to increase the degree.

Feature B12. In the special game state, after the round game of 1 is completed, a waiting period is provided for waiting for the start of the next round game with the variable ball entry means as the second state.
The gaming machine according to feature B11, wherein the notification executing means includes means for executing the specific notification at least during the waiting period.

Since the variable ball entry means is in the second state during the standby period, by performing a specific notification during the period, attention is not taken to whether or not the game ball enters the variable ball entry means. You can see and hear the notification. Therefore, it is possible to preferably suppress oversight of the specific notification, and to make it easy for the player to grasp the specific number of each round game through the specific notification.

Feature B13. The gaming machine according to feature B12, wherein the specific notification includes notification that the player can recognize the specific number of the next round games.

According to the above configuration, the player can grasp the specific number of the round games before the start of the round games, and can perform the notification highly convenient for the player.

Feature B14. The notification executing means is characterized in that, when a predetermined predetermined condition is satisfied during the special gaming state, the notification executing means is provided with a means for executing the specific notification in the special gaming state in which the predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to feature B13.

In the above configuration, under the configuration in which the specific number of each round game is diversified, the notification is performed by satisfying a predetermined condition in the special game state, and the specific number of each round game in the special game state is set. It is possible to provide a game to grasp. As a result, it is possible to provide a game that does not stop at simply inserting the game ball into the variable ball entry means, and it is possible to suitably suppress the monotonization of the game during the special game state.

Feature B15. The notification executing means is a means for executing the specific notification so that the player can recognize the specific number of the round games executed after the round in which the predetermined condition is satisfied or after the round in which the predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to feature B14, characterized in that

In the above configuration, a specific number of round games after or after the round in which the predetermined condition is satisfied is notified. Therefore, the earlier the predetermined condition is satisfied in the special game state, the more the specific number of round games are specified. It becomes possible to know. As a result, it is possible to impart the enjoyment of playing with the aim of satisfying the predetermined conditions as soon as possible, and it is possible to preferably suppress the monotonization of the game during the special game state.

Feature B16. The variable ball entry means is provided with a specific area (detection area of the V winning sensor 507) through which the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means can pass.
In the special game state, when the game ball passes through the specific area during the execution of the round game, the next round game is executed, while the game ball passes through the specific area during the execution of the round game. If not, it is configured so that the next round game will not be executed.
When the game ball passes through the specific area during the execution of the round game, the round game ending means determines whether or not the number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means has reached the specific number. The description according to any one of features B1 to B15, which comprises means for ending the round game being executed (a function of executing the process of steps S610 to S612 by the main control device 81). Game machine.

In the above configuration, when a specific area is passed during the execution of a round game, the next round game is executed, but the number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means has not reached the specific number. However, the round game ends. That is, if the player passes through the specific area at an early stage of the round game, the round game ends early. Therefore, when the game ball passes through the specific area at the timing when the specific number of game balls enters the variable ball entry means or at a timing close to the timing, the next round game is executed while continuing the round game for a long time. It will be possible and ideal for the player. In this case, since the specific number of each round game is diversified, the number of hit balls corresponding to the specific number is not uniform, and the ideal passage timing of the specific area fluctuates. It becomes a thing. Under such a configuration, by performing a specific notification that notifies a specific number of each round game, the player can grasp which number of balls corresponds to the specific number, and the game can be advantageously played. It will be possible to proceed.

Feature B17. Equipped with a launching means (game ball launch mechanism 53) capable of launching a game ball based on a predetermined launch operation.
When the game ball is launched by the first launch operation (the operation of launching the game ball with the strength to enter the right entrance portion 504), the game ball that has entered the variable entry means can reach or reach the specific area. When the game ball is launched by a second launch operation (an operation of launching a game ball with a strength of entering the left entrance portion 505) different from the first launch operation, the ball enters the variable ball entry means. The game machine according to feature B16, wherein the game ball is configured so as not to reach the specific area or to be harder to reach than in the case of the first launch operation.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not to pass the game ball through the specific area, so that the player can determine the timing of passing the game ball through the specific area. In this case, if the player can know the specific number of games in each round, the game ball can be passed to the specific area at an ideal timing according to the skill of the player. Therefore, the value of the specific notification for the player is increased, and the motivation for executing the specific notification can be suitably increased.

The invention described in the above features B1 to B17 states, "For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, when a lottery process is executed based on a predetermined lottery opportunity and the lottery result becomes a specific result, Regarding the background technology that shifts to a special gaming state that is more advantageous for the player than the normal gaming state (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-81853), "Here, in the gaming machine, to the game There is still room for improvement in raising the degree of attention of the ”, which was made with the problem to be solved.

It should be noted that, for each configuration of the above features B1 to B17, the technical configuration shown by any one of features A1 to A16, features B1 to B17, features C1 to C20, features D1 to D13, and features E1 to E12 is shown. It is possible to apply each idea individually, or it is possible to apply a part or all of each technical idea in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic C group>
Feature C1. A launching means (game ball launch mechanism 53) capable of launching a game ball based on a predetermined launch operation, and
A transition determination means (a function of executing a hit / fail determination by the main control device 81) that executes a predetermined transition determination based on a predetermined determination trigger, and
When the result of the predetermined transition determination is a predetermined transition correspondence result, the first transition means (mainly) for shifting the gaming state to a special gaming state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. (A function to execute the game state transition process by the control device 81) and
After the end of the special gaming state, it is possible to shift to a specific gaming state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state and different from the special gaming state. The second transition means (a function of executing the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode by the main controller 81) and
It is a game machine equipped with
A specific area (falling area 703a) through which the game ball launched by the launching means can pass is provided.
A specific means (falling prize sensor 703) capable of identifying that the game ball has passed through the specific area is provided.
When the specific means specifies that the game ball has passed through the specific area, or when the specific event is based on the specific means (for detecting the passage of the game ball to the fall area 703a). If the lottery is won based on the above, the number of times the game ball has been detected to pass through the fall area 703a has reached a predetermined number, etc.) occurs, the specific game is performed after the end of the special game state or from the specific game state. A third transition means (mainly) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the state and can be shifted to a predetermined gaming state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) different from the normal gaming state or the normal gaming state. A gaming machine characterized by having a function of executing a transition process at the end of an opening / closing execution mode by a control device 81).

According to the above configuration, when the game ball passes through the specific area, the game state does not shift to the specific game state, which is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, the player enjoys the game ball without passing it through the specific area. be able to. Moreover, since a game is realized in which the behavior of the game ball causes the player to shift to a fall state or avoid it, the structure is easier for the player to understand than the structure by internal processing such as a fall lottery. Not only can you do this, but you can also improve the original appeal of the game machine, which you can enjoy watching the behavior of the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game and increase the degree of attention to the game.

In addition, in this feature, the description that "it is more disadvantageous to the player than the specific gaming state and shifts to a predetermined gaming state different from the normal gaming state or the normal gaming state" is regarded as one of the gaming states. It does not mean that it is essential to have a predetermined gaming state, and the gaming machine according to this feature may not have a predetermined gaming state. That is, the above description states, "If the player shifts to the normal gaming state or is more disadvantageous to the player than the specific gaming state and has a predetermined gaming state different from the normal gaming state, the predetermined gaming state Alternatively, it can be understood as "shifting to the normal gaming state".

Feature C2. When the identification is performed by the specific means or the specific event occurs, the third transition means changes from the special gaming state to the predetermined gaming state or the normal gaming state after the end of the special gaming state or from the specific gaming state. On the other hand, when the specific means does not perform the specific event or the specific event does not occur, the specific game state is shifted to the specific game state or the specific game state is continued after the end of the special game state. The gaming machine according to feature C1, which is characterized in that it is configured.

In the above configuration, if the game ball passes through the specific area, it is disadvantageous to the player, and if the game ball does not pass through the specific area, it is advantageous to the player. Therefore, the player aims to prevent the game ball from passing through the specific area. It is possible to play games and improve the interest of the games.

Feature C3. The first aspect, which is provided corresponding to the specific area and allows or easily allows the game ball to pass through the specific area, and the first aspect which does not allow the game ball to pass through the specific area. A switching means (shutter 706) capable of switching to the second mode, which is less tolerable than
Switching control in which the switching means is changed from the second mode to the first mode, and then the second mode is set, based on a predetermined specific opportunity (the winning of the upper limit winning item occurs in the final round). (A function of executing shutter drive processing by the main control device 81) and a switching control means for executing the above at least once.
The gaming machine according to the feature C1 or the feature C2, which comprises the feature C1 or the feature C2.

In the above configuration, the switching means changes whether or not the game ball can pass through the specific area or the ease of passing, and the game ball does not flow down to or near the specific area in the situation where the switching means is the first aspect. You can play with expectation. Further, by having the second aspect, it is possible to secure a period during which the player can launch the game ball with peace of mind, and it is possible to improve the hobby as a whole.

Feature C4. Equipped with a passing part (winning sensor 702) through which the game ball can pass
The gaming machine according to feature C3, wherein the specific opportunity is established based on the passage of the gaming ball through the passing portion.

In the above configuration, when the game ball passes through the passing portion, the game ball changes from a state in which the game ball cannot pass or is difficult to pass to a state in which the game ball can pass or easily passes through the specific area. Therefore, first of all, the game can be enjoyed by preventing the game ball from passing through the passing portion, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game in combination with the configuration of the above feature C2.

Feature C5. A ball entry portion (large winning opening 32a) provided in a game area where the game ball launched by the launching means can flow down and into which the game ball can enter,
When a game ball enters the ball entry portion, a payout means (payout device 96) capable of paying out a predetermined number of game balls and
With
In the game area, the passage portion is provided on the upstream side or the downstream side of the entry portion, and the game ball launched in a manner capable of reaching the entry portion is configured to reach the passage portion. The gaming machine according to feature C4, characterized in that it is present.

For example, if the game ball is launched with a strength that does not reach the passing portion, the passage of the game ball to the passing portion can be avoided, and the player can perform such a firing operation from beginning to end. In the case of the configuration, the significance of providing the passing portion and the switching means for switching the game ball to a state in which the game ball can pass or easily pass through the specific area when the passing portion is passed is lost. In this regard, in this configuration, a ball entry section is provided in which the game ball (prize ball) is paid out based on the entry ball of the game ball, and when the game ball is launched with a strength that can reach the entry section, the game ball is launched. Because the structure is such that the ball can reach the passing part, it is not possible to avoid the passing part in order to obtain the prize ball, and the game is enjoyed by paying attention to whether or not the game ball passes through the passing part. It becomes possible to bring out favorably.

Feature C6. Variable ball entry means (variable winning device) that can switch between the first state in which the game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and the second state in which the game ball cannot enter or is more difficult to enter than the first state. 32) and
In the special gaming state, the variable ball entry control means (main control device) that changes the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state, and then executes the variable ball entry control that changes to the second state at least once. Function to execute the opening and closing process of the big winning opening by 81) and
With
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C5, characterized in that the gaming ball launched in a manner capable of reaching the variable ball entry means is configured to reach the specific region.

In the above configuration, when the game ball is launched with a strength that can reach the variable ball entry means, the game ball can reach a specific area. Therefore, the game ball is inserted into the variable ball entry means in the special game state. It is possible to give a game aiming to prevent the game ball from passing through a specific area. As a result, if it is possible to prevent the game ball from passing through the specific area in the special game state, the game state shifts to the specific game state that is advantageous to the player after the end of the special game state, and the game is played in the specific area. When the ball has passed, it is possible to provide a game that shifts to a predetermined game state or a normal game state that is more disadvantageous than the specific game state. In other words, the game in the special game state is a pleasure for the player to expect to get a lot of balls, but it is exciting by interweaving the tension that the game ball will fall when it passes through a specific area. It is possible to create both excitement and to realize a highly entertaining special game state that does not become a work for the player.

Feature C7. Variable ball entry means (variable winning device) that can switch between the first state in which the game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and the second state in which the game ball cannot enter or is more difficult to enter than the first state. 32) and
In the special gaming state, the variable ball entry control means (main control device) that changes the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state, and then executes the variable ball entry control that changes to the second state at least once. Function to execute the opening and closing process of the big winning opening by 81) and
The first aspect, which is provided corresponding to the specific area and allows or easily allows the game ball to pass through the specific area, and the first aspect which does not allow the game ball to pass through the specific area. A switching means (shutter 706) capable of switching to the second mode, which is less tolerable than
Switching control in which the switching means is changed from the second mode to the first mode, and then the second mode is set, based on a predetermined specific opportunity (the winning of the upper limit winning item occurs in the final round). (A function of executing shutter drive processing by the main control device 81) and a switching control means for executing the above at least once.
With
The game according to any one of features C1 to C6, characterized in that the switching control can be executed by the switching control means during the execution of the variable ball entry control by the variable ball entry control means. Machine.

For example, if the game ball can always pass through the specific area, the player may hesitate to launch the game ball as a result of fear of the game ball passing through the specific area. In this respect, in this feature, since a switching means for switching between the first mode in which the game ball can pass or easily passes through the specific area and the second mode in which the game ball cannot pass or is difficult to pass through is provided, even if the game ball is launched. A period that does not pass through a specific area is secured. In addition, since the switching control for switching to the first aspect is performed during the execution of the variable ball entry control in which the variable ball entry means is switched to the first state, the game ball is specified in the special gaming state. It is possible to give a game that encourages whether or not to pass through the area, and it is possible to suppress the monotonization of the game in the special game state.

Feature C8. The variable ball entry control means is a first period setting means (1st period setting means) for setting a first period (opening period of the variable winning device 32) in which the variable ball entry means is in the first state in one variable ball entry control. A function to execute the opening / closing process of the big winning opening by the main control device 81)
The switching control means is a second period setting means (for driving a shutter by the main control device 81) for setting a second period (opening period of the shutter 706) in which the switching means is the first aspect in one switching control. Has a function to execute processing)
The gaming machine according to feature C7, wherein the second period setting means includes means for setting a period shorter than the first period as the second period.

In the above configuration, the variable ball entry means is set to the first state under the configuration in which the switching control (switching to a state in which the game ball can pass or easily pass through the specific area) is performed during the execution of the variable ball entry control. Since the switching means is the first aspect in a range shorter than the period, it is suppressed that the game ball is excessively likely to pass through the specific area in the special gaming state. As a result, the player can play the special game state with peace of mind, and it is possible to suppress that the fun of the special game state is spoiled by providing the specific area and the third transition means. ..

Feature C9. The first aspect, which is provided corresponding to the specific area and allows or easily allows the game ball to pass through the specific area, and the first aspect which does not allow the game ball to pass through the specific area. A switching means (shutter 706) capable of switching to the second mode, which is more difficult to tolerate, is provided.
After the predetermined game start timing (start timing of the open / close execution mode), the first game (16R jackpot result A) is such that the switching timing at which the switching means is switched from the second aspect to the first aspect is the first timing. Opening and closing execution mode corresponding to) and
A second game (opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result C) that causes the switching timing to be a second timing different from the first timing after the predetermined game start timing.
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C8, characterized in that

In the above configuration, a switching means for switching between the first mode in which the game ball can pass or easily passes through the specific area and the second mode in which the game ball cannot pass or is difficult to pass through is provided. In this case, for example, if the switching timing to the first aspect is fixed, the player can predict the switching timing, and as a result, it is only necessary to pay attention to the timing, and the specific area And there is a risk that the fun of providing the third transition means will be diminished. In this respect, in this feature, a first game that switches to the first mode at the first timing and a second game that switches to the first mode at a second timing different from the first timing are provided, and the first mode is set. The switching timing of is diversified. For this reason, it becomes difficult for the player to determine the switching timing, and it is possible to preferably arouse a feeling of excitement as to which timing is the first aspect. As a result, the effects of the specific area and the third transition means can be suitably exhibited, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Feature C10. Variable ball entry means (variable winning device) that can switch between the first state in which the game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and the second state in which the game ball cannot enter or is more difficult to enter than the first state. 32) and
In the special gaming state, the variable ball entry control means (main control device) that changes the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state, and then executes the variable ball entry control that changes to the second state at least once. Function to execute the opening and closing process of the big winning opening by 81) and
With
The gaming machine according to feature C9, wherein the first game and the second game are games in the special gaming state.

In the above configuration, when the game ball passes through the specific area during the special game state, the game state shifts (falls) to the predetermined game state or the normal game state, and the switching timing to the first mode (passable state) The timing of switching to) has been diversified. Due to the element that the game ball falls when it passes through a specific area during the special game state, even though the tension that is not in the general special game state is given, the above switching timing is further given. It is difficult to understand or understand. Therefore, it is possible to incorporate a strong feeling of excitement into the game in the special game state, and it is possible to preferably suppress the game in the special game state from becoming monotonous.

Feature C11. Variable ball entry means (variable winning device) that can switch between the first state in which the game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and the second state in which the game ball cannot enter or is more difficult to enter than the first state. 32) and
In the special gaming state, the variable ball entry control means (main control device) that changes the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state, and then executes the variable ball entry control that changes to the second state at least once. Function to execute the opening and closing process of the big winning opening by 81) and
With
The specific area is provided in the variable ball entry means.
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C10, characterized in that the gaming ball that has entered the variable ball entering means is configured to reach the specific region.

In the above configuration, a specific area is provided in the variable ball entry means, and the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means can pass through the specific area. As a result, when the game ball passes through the specific area during the special game state, it is possible to grant a game in which the game state shifts (falls) to a predetermined game state or a normal game state, and the game in the special game state It becomes possible to preferably suppress monotonization.

Feature C12. The first aspect, which is provided in the variable ball entry means and allows or easily allows the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means to pass through the specific region, and the variable ball entry means. A switching means (shutter 706) capable of switching to a second aspect in which the game ball is not allowed to pass through the specific area or is less tolerable than the first aspect.
Switching control in which the switching means is changed from the second mode to the first mode, and then the second mode is set, based on a predetermined specific opportunity (the winning of the upper limit winning item occurs in the final round). (A function of executing shutter drive processing by the main control device 81) and a switching control means for executing the above at least once.
The gaming machine according to the feature C11, which is characterized by the above.

For example, if the game ball can always pass through a specific area, the player may hesitate to enter the game ball into the variable entry means, which causes the variable entry means to enter the ball. The original game of the special game state in which the player is allowed to obtain a prize ball is impaired. In this regard, in this configuration, since a switching means for switching between the first mode in which the game ball can pass or easily passes through the specific area and the second mode in which the game ball cannot pass or is difficult to pass through is provided, the variable ball entry means is provided with the game ball. A period is secured that does not pass through a specific area even if the ball is inserted. As a result, it is possible to generate a ball entering the variable ball entering means while preventing the game ball from passing through the specific region in consideration of the period or the timing of the first aspect. That is, it is possible to give a game aiming at preventing the game ball from passing through a specific area while suppressing the damage to the original game in the special game state.

Feature C13. The first region as the specific region and
A second region (detection region of the V winning sensor 705) through which a game ball provided in the variable ball entry means and whose passage of the first region is restricted by the switching means can pass is
A privilege granting means (a function of executing a round update or ending start process by the main control device 81) capable of granting a privilege (round continuation) to a player based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the second area, and
The gaming machine according to the feature C12, which is characterized by the above.

In the above configuration, since it is indispensable to put the game ball into the variable ball entry means in order to obtain the privilege, it is suppressed that the player keeps avoiding the variable ball entry means and launches the game ball. It becomes possible to preferably exert the significance of the region (first region).

Feature C14. The special game state is
The configuration is such that the round game in which the switching control is executed at least once can be executed a plurality of times.
When the game ball passes through the second area during the execution of the round game, the next round game is executed, while the game ball does not pass through the second area during the execution of the round game. , The next round game is configured not to be executed,
The gaming machine according to feature C13, wherein the privilege is that the next round game is executed.

According to the above configuration, the next round game is not executed unless the game ball is passed through the second region, and the game in the special game state is not executed satisfactorily. Therefore, the game ball enters the variable ball entry means. It is preferably prompted, and it becomes possible to provide an opportunity to be excited and enjoy whether or not the game ball passes through the first region.

Feature C15. The special game state has a configuration capable of executing a round game in which the variable ball entry control is executed at least once a plurality of times.
The switching control means is a means (main control device) that performs the switching control based on the round game being executed or the round game being executed being the round game of a predetermined round (16th round game). The gaming machine according to any one of features C12 to C14, which comprises a function of executing a shutter driving process according to 81).

According to the above configuration, it is possible to make the player predict the round in which the game ball can pass through the specific area, and provide a game to be enjoyed aiming at preventing the game ball from passing through the specific area.

Feature C16. The variable ball entry control means determines the number of times the variable ball entry control is performed in one round game or the specific number of times the variable ball entry means is put into the first state (the number of times the variable winning device 32 is opened). It is equipped with a setting means for setting the number of times to be set (a function of executing the setting process for each round by the main controller 81).
The number-of-times setting means
First means of setting the first number (8 times) as the specific number (a function of setting the number of times the variable winning device 32 is opened in the first to tenth rounds in the open / close execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result B) When,
The second means (the variable winning device 32 in the 11th to 16th rounds in the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result B) sets the second number (1 time) different from the first number as the specific number of times. Function to set the number of times of opening) and
The gaming machine according to feature C15, characterized in that

In the above configuration, since the number of variable ball entry controls of the variable ball entry means per round is diversified, the number of round games being executed is determined from the behavior of the variable ball entry means. It becomes indistinguishable or difficult to discriminate. For this reason, it is unpredictable or difficult to predict when the switching round to the first state (the round in which the game ball can pass through the first region) will arrive, and the configuration of the above feature C15 can be suitably enhanced. It will be possible.

Feature C17. After the end of the special gaming state, the third transition means changes the gaming state to the predetermined gaming state or the normal gaming state based on the passage of the gaming ball through the specific region or the occurrence of the specific event. The gaming machine according to any one of the features C9 to C16, which is characterized in that the game is shifted to.

According to the above configuration, when the game ball passes through a specific area in the special game state, it is possible to provide a game that shifts (falls) to a predetermined game state or a normal game state after the end of the special game state. It can be a practically preferable embodiment in realizing any of the configurations C9 to C16.

Feature C18. A ball entry portion where the game ball launched by the launching means is provided in the game area where the game ball can flow down and the game ball can enter,
When a game ball enters the ball entry portion, a payout means capable of paying out a predetermined number of game balls and
With
In the game area, the specific area is provided on the upstream side or the downstream side of the ball entry portion, and the game ball launched in a manner that can reach the ball entry portion is configured to reach the specific area. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C8, characterized in that it is present.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to provide a game aiming at preventing the game ball from passing through a specific area while the game ball is inserted into a predetermined ball entry portion to obtain a prize ball.

Feature C19. The gaming machine according to feature C18, wherein the transition determination means executes the predetermined transition determination based on the game ball entering the ball entry portion.

In the above configuration, since the ball entry portion is a so-called starting port, it is not possible to avoid entering the ball entry section and play the game, and the game ball is launched in a state where the game ball can reach a specific area. I have no choice but to do it. As a result, it is possible to preferably arouse a feeling of excitement that the game ball may pass through a specific area, and it is possible to preferably enhance the interest of the game.

Feature C20. The third transition means changes the gaming state from the specific gaming state to the specific gaming state based on the passage of the gaming ball through the specific region or the occurrence of the specific event in the situation where the gaming state is the specific gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature C18 or feature C19, which is characterized in that it shifts to a predetermined gaming state or the normal gaming state.

According to the above configuration, if the game ball passes through the specific area while the game ball is being inserted into the entry portion in the specific game state, the game falls from the specific game state to the predetermined game state or the normal game state. It becomes possible to preferably exert the effect of the feature C18 or the feature C19.

The invention described in the above features C1 to C20 states, "For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, when a lottery process is executed based on a predetermined lottery opportunity and the lottery result becomes a specific result, Regarding the background technology that shifts to a special gaming state that is more advantageous for the player than the normal gaming state (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-81853), "Here, in the gaming machine, to the game There is still room for improvement in raising the degree of attention of the ”, which was made with the problem to be solved.

It should be noted that, for each configuration of the above features C1 to C20, the technical structure shown by any one of features A1 to A16, features B1 to B17, features C1 to C20, features D1 to D13, and features E1 to E12 is shown. It is possible to apply each idea individually, or it is possible to apply a part or all of each technical idea in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. A launching means (game ball launch mechanism 53) capable of launching a game ball based on a predetermined launch operation, and
The first region (detection region of the winning sensors 702 and 802) through which the game ball launched by the launching means can pass, and
A second region (detection region of the fall winning sensor 703, detection region of the high-accuracy V winning sensor 803) provided on the downstream side of the first region and through which the game ball can pass,
The first specific event based on the passage of the game ball through the second region or the passage of the game ball through the second region (the lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the fall region 703a was won, the fall region 703a Specific processing execution means (main control device 81) that executes specific processing (falling to low-probability mode, transition to high-probability mode) based on the occurrence of the number of times the game ball has passed to the game ball has reached a predetermined number of times. (A function to execute the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode) and
The first aspect (open state) in which the game ball is provided corresponding to the second region and allows or is easy to allow the game ball to pass through the second region, and the game ball passes through the second region. Switching means (shutters 706, 808) capable of switching to the second aspect (closed state), which is unacceptable or less acceptable than the first aspect, and
A second specific event based on the passage of the game ball through the first region or the passage of the game ball through the first region (the number of times the game ball has passed through the detection area of the winning sensors 702 and 802 reaches a predetermined number of times. The switching control for switching the switching means from the second aspect to the first aspect is executed based on the occurrence of (such as winning a lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the detection area of the winning sensors 702 and 802). Switching control means (a function of executing shutter drive processing or V distribution processing by the main control device 81) and
With
When the switching means is switched to the first aspect by the switching control means, the passing ball of the first region that triggered the execution of the switching control is configured to be able to pass through the second region. A game machine characterized by that.

In the above configuration, a second region in which the specific process is executed when the game ball passes, and a switching means for switching the second region to a state in which the game ball can pass or easily pass by the switching control are provided. Further, the switching control of the switching means is performed based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first region provided separately from the second region or the occurrence of the second specific event based on the passage. In this case, for example, when the specific processing is not desirable for the player, the launch mode of the game ball is adjusted so as not to pass through the second region after seeing that the game ball has passed through the first region. Such actions are assumed. If such an act of capture is rampant, the fairness of the game among the players may be impaired. In this respect, in this feature, since the passing ball itself, which triggered the execution of the switching control, passes through the second region, it is not in time to deal with it after seeing that the game ball has passed through the first region. Such an act of capture can be suitably suppressed. As a result, the fairness of the game is ensured, and as a result, the motivation for the game is aroused, and it becomes possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature D2. The feature D1 is characterized in that it is provided with regulatory means (right vertical passage portion 701, first passage portion 801) for restricting the game ball from passing through the second region without passing through the first region. Described gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent an unexpected game ball from flowing into the second region. As a result, the occurrence of disturbance is suppressed, and the fairness of the game can be suitably ensured. In addition, since the flow of the game ball to be considered when designing the game machine can be limited, it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden at the time of design.

Feature D3. A passage portion (right vertical passage portion 701, first passage portion 801) capable of guiding the game ball that has passed through the first region to the second region is provided.
The passage portion is formed by a wall portion extending along the moving direction of the game ball moving in the passage portion.
The gaming machine according to feature D2, wherein the regulatory means is configured by the wall portion.

For example, it is conceivable that a game nail provided between the first region and the second region guides the game ball that has passed through the first region to the second region. However, the moving speed of the game ball varies due to the unevenness between the game nails, and in relation to the period in which the switching means is the first aspect, the passing ball in the first region that triggered the execution of the switching control is the first. It is assumed that the behavior may become unstable because it may or may not pass through the two regions. In this respect, in this feature, since the game ball that has passed through the first region is guided to the second region by using the passage portion formed by the wall portion extending along the movement direction of the game ball, the moving speed of the game ball, etc. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of variation in. As a result, the time required for the game ball that has passed through the first region to reach the second region can be made uniform, and the passing ball in the first region that triggered the execution of the switching control can be stably seconded. It will be possible to pass through the area.

Feature D4. After the switching means is changed from the second aspect to the first aspect by the switching control, the passing ball of the first region that triggered the execution of the switching control is configured to reach the second region. The gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D3.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to preferably realize a configuration in which the passing sphere in the first region that triggered the execution of the switching control passes through the second region.

Feature D5. The time required for the game ball that has passed through the first region to reach the switching means or the second region is the switching control after the game ball that triggers the execution of the switching control passes through the first region. The features D1 to D4 are characterized in that the passage length between the first region and the second region is set so that the switching means is longer than the period until the first aspect is set. The gaming machine described in either.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to preferably realize a configuration in which the passing sphere in the first region that triggered the execution of the switching control passes through the second region.

Feature D6. A passage portion (right vertical passage portion 850) that guides the game ball that has passed through the first region to the second region,
Means (protruding portion 851) capable of reducing the moving speed of the game ball moving in the passage portion or stopping the game ball in the passage portion.
The gaming machine according to the feature D5, which is characterized by the above.

In the above configuration, since the game ball is decelerated or stopped in the passage portion, the time required for the game ball that has passed through the first region to reach the second region can be lengthened. As a result, the passing ball in the first region, which triggered the execution of the switching control, can be stably passed to the second region while keeping the passage length of the passage portion short. As a result, the entire configuration including the first region, the second region, and the passage portion can be compactly formed, and the optimum configuration can be obtained in a game machine in which the installation area of the game parts is limited.

Feature D7. The switching means has a movable body (shutter 865) that can be displaced to a first position (open position) corresponding to the first aspect and a second position (closed position) corresponding to the second aspect. Cage,
A passage portion (second passage portion 862) that extends in the front-rear direction of the game machine or in the left-right direction of the game machine and guides a game ball that has passed through the first region is provided.
An opening (opening 864) that opens downward is provided at least a part of the bottom portion (bottom 862a) of the passage portion, and the second region is provided below the opening.
When the movable body is arranged in the first position, the opening is opened so that the game ball can pass through, and when the movable body is arranged in the second position, the movable body is opened in the opening. The gaming machine according to feature D1 or feature D2, wherein at least a part of the bottom portion is formed by the above.

In the above configuration, since the game ball that has passed through the first region is guided to the passage portion extending in the front-rear direction of the game machine or in the left-right direction of the game machine, the game ball is compared with the case where the game ball is dropped in the passage portion extending in the vertical direction, for example. The moving speed of the can be made slow. After that, the movable body is displaced to the first position and the second position, and the movable body is dropped downward in the process of passing the game ball to the second region, which serves as an opportunity to execute the switching control. The passing ball in the first region can be guided to the second region with a margin. Therefore, it is possible to more preferably suppress the adjusting action after seeing that the game ball has passed through the first region.

Feature D8. In a situation where the movable body is arranged at the second position and the movable body constitutes at least a part of the bottom portion, the moving speed of the game ball moving on the movable body is reduced or on the movable body. The gaming machine according to feature D7, characterized in that it is provided with a means capable of stopping the gaming ball.

With the above configuration, it becomes possible to more reliably guide the passing ball in the first region, which triggered the execution of the switching control, to the second region. Further, depending on the degree of deceleration or stopping, not only the passing ball that triggered the execution of the switching control but also the game ball that has passed through the first region in front of the passing ball can be guided to the second region. As a result, it becomes possible to more preferably suppress the adjusting action after seeing that the game ball has passed through the first region.

Feature D9. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D8, wherein the configuration is more advantageous to the player when the specific processing is not executed than when the specific processing is executed.

In the above configuration, it is more disadvantageous for the player when the specific process is executed. Therefore, after seeing that the game ball has passed through the first region, the launch mode of the game ball is set so as not to pass through the second region. There is a risk of adjustment. Under such a configuration, by providing the configuration described in any of the above features D1 to D8, it is possible to suitably suppress the attacking action of avoiding the passage of the game ball to the second region. ..

Feature D10. A transition determination means (a function of executing a hit / fail determination by the main control device 81) that executes a predetermined transition determination based on a predetermined determination trigger, and
When the result of the predetermined transition determination is a predetermined transition correspondence result, the first transition means (mainly) for shifting the gaming state to a special gaming state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. (A function to execute the game state transition process by the control device 81) and
After the end of the special gaming state, it is possible to shift to a specific gaming state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state and different from the special gaming state. The second transition means (a function of executing the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode by the main controller 81) and
After the end of the special gaming state or from the specific gaming state, a predetermined gaming state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the specific gaming state and different from the normal gaming state or A third transition means (a function of executing the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode by the main control device 81) capable of transitioning to the normal gaming state, and
With
The specific processing execution means is the third transition means, and is
The third transition means executes a transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode by the main control device 81 to shift to the predetermined gaming state or the normal gaming state based on the passage of the game ball through the second region. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D8, which is characterized by having a function of performing.

In the above configuration, when the game ball passes through the second area, the game state shifts (falls) to a predetermined game state or a normal game state. Therefore, after seeing that the game ball has passed through the first area, the second The act of adjusting the firing mode so as not to pass through the area may be performed. Under such a configuration, by providing the configuration described in any of the above features D1 to D8, it is possible to suitably suppress the attacking action of avoiding the passage of the game ball to the second region. ..

Feature D11. The specific process is any one of the features D1 to D8, which is characterized in that the player is given a privilege (transition to the high probability mode) based on the passage of the game ball through the second region. The game machine described.

In the above configuration, since the privilege is given when the game ball passes through the second area, the launch mode of the game ball is set so that the game ball passes through the second area after seeing that the game ball has passed through the first area. There is a risk of adjustment. Under such a configuration, by providing the configuration described in any of the above features D1 to D8, it is possible to suitably suppress the attacking action of intentionally passing the game ball into the second region. ..

Feature D12. A transition determination means (a function of executing a hit / fail determination by the main control device 81) that executes a predetermined transition determination based on a predetermined determination trigger, and
When the result of the predetermined transition determination is a predetermined transition correspondence result, the first transition means (mainly) for shifting the gaming state to a special gaming state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. (A function to execute the game state transition process by the control device 81) and
After the end of the special gaming state, it is possible to shift to a specific gaming state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state and different from the special gaming state. The second transition means (a function of executing the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode by the main controller 81) and
With
The specific processing execution means is the second transition means, and is
The second transition means includes means for transitioning to the specific game state based on the passage of the game ball through the second region (a function of executing the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode by the main control device 81). The gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D8.

According to the above configuration, when the game ball passes through the second region, the game shifts to a specific gaming state which is advantageous to the player. Therefore, after seeing that the game ball has passed through the first region, the game ball passes through the second region. There is a possibility that the act of adjusting the launch mode of the game ball is performed. Under such a configuration, by providing the configuration described in any of the above features D1 to D8, it is possible to suitably suppress the attacking action of intentionally passing the game ball into the second region. ..

Feature D13. Among the game balls that have passed through the first region, a passing ball that is not the execution trigger and has passed through the first region after the passing ball that triggered the execution passes through the second region. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D12, which comprises a limiting means capable of limiting the above.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to more preferably suppress the adjusting action after seeing that the game ball has passed through the first region.

The invention described in the above features D1 to D13 states that "for example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the gaming ball is paid out based on the entry of the gaming ball into the entry portion provided in the gaming area. Regarding the background technology that "what to do is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-81853)", "Here, there is still room for improvement in increasing the attention to the game in the gaming machine." The invention was made with the problem to be solved.

It should be noted that, for each configuration of the above features D1 to D13, the technical configuration shown by any one of features A1 to A16, features B1 to B17, features C1 to C20, features D1 to D13, and features E1 to E12 is shown. It is possible to apply each idea individually, or it is possible to apply a part or all of each technical idea in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. A launching means (game ball launch mechanism 53) capable of launching a game ball based on a predetermined launch operation, and
The first region (left entrance 505 or winning sensor 509) through which the game ball launched by the first launch operation (the operation of launching the game ball with the strength to enter the left entrance 505) and
A second region (right entrance 504 or winning sensor) through which the game ball launched by the second launch operation (operation of launching the game ball with a strength to enter the right entrance portion 504) different from the first launch operation can pass. 802) and
When the game ball passes through the first region in the first game situation (a situation in which a round game in which the shutter 808 operates in a high distribution mode is being executed), a predetermined predetermined privilege (round continuation) is given. , The first means to make the game ball pass through the second region in the first game situation, which is more advantageous to the player than when the predetermined privilege is given (transition to the high probability mode). (A function to execute V distribution processing by the main controller 81, large winning opening opening / closing processing, and transition processing at the end of the opening / closing execution mode)
When the game ball passes through the first region in a second game situation different from the first game situation (a situation in which a round game in which the shutter 808 operates in a low distribution mode is being executed), the predetermined privilege is granted. When the game ball passes through the second area in the second game situation, it is more disadvantageous to the player than when the predetermined privilege is given (the round is not continued and the mode shifts to the high probability mode). Second means (function to execute V distribution processing by the main controller 81, large winning opening opening / closing processing, transition processing at the end of the opening / closing execution mode),
A game machine characterized by being equipped with.

In the above configuration, a first area and a second area are provided so that the player can hit the game ball separately. In the first area, a predetermined privilege can be obtained regardless of the game situation, and in the second area. , Under the first game situation, it is more advantageous for the player than when the predetermined privilege is given, and under the second game situation, it is more disadvantageous for the player than when the predetermined privilege is given. Has been done. As a result, either the game ball is allowed to flow down to the first area to aim for a predetermined privilege, or the game ball is caused to flow down to the second area and there is a risk of falling into a more disadvantageous situation than the predetermined privilege. The player himself can choose whether to aim for the transition to a favorable situation. In this case, since the judgment of the player affects the result of the game, active participation in the game can be achieved, and the degree of attention to the game can be improved. Further, in the above configuration, a player who wants to enjoy a thrill and aim to acquire a big privilege actively plays a game in which the game ball is made to flow down to the second area, and a player who does not like the thrill makes the game ball the first. You can play a game that flows down to the area. That is, it is possible to change the way of playing according to the taste of each player and the mood of each player, and it is possible to provide various ways of enjoying with one game machine.

Feature E2. A transition determination means (a function of executing a hit / fail determination by the main control device 81) that executes a predetermined transition determination based on a predetermined determination trigger, and
When the result of the predetermined transition determination is a predetermined transition correspondence result, the gaming state transition means (mainly) for shifting the gaming state to a special gaming state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. (A function to execute the game state transition process by the control device 81) and
In the first period during the special game state (execution period of the 10th round game in the open / close execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result A), the first game situation is reached, and the first period during the special game state. Means for ensuring the second game situation in the second period (execution period of the fifth round game in the open / close execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result A) different from the above (for each round by the main controller 81) The gaming machine according to feature E1, characterized in that it has a function of executing the setting process of the above.

According to the above configuration, since the first game situation and the second game situation are switched in the special game state, the player can play either the first area or the second area while playing the special game state. You will be forced to choose whether to aim for, and you can play a special game state with a certain sense of tension. As a result, the game in the special game state can be greatly excited as compared with the case where the special game state is simply digested, and the motivation for the game can be suitably increased.

Feature E3. Variable ball entry means (variable winning device) that can switch between the first state in which the game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and the second state in which the game ball cannot enter or is more difficult to enter than the first state. 32) and
A switching control means (a function of executing a large winning opening opening / closing process by the main control device 81) that executes switching control for changing the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state and then changing to the second state. ,
With
The special gaming state is configured to be able to execute a round game in which the switching control is executed at least once a plurality of times.
The first game situation is a situation in which the first round game (the tenth round game in the open / close execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result A) is being executed in the special game state, and the second game situation is the above. A feature E2 characterized in that a second round game (fifth round game in the open / close execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result A) different from the first round game is being executed in the special game state. The game machine described in.

According to the above configuration, one round game in the special game state is in the first game situation, and the other one round game is in the second game situation. Therefore, the player can use the first area in the round game. You will be forced to choose which of the second areas you should aim for, and you will be able to play the special game state in a certain sense of tension.

Feature E4. The special gaming state is provided with a plurality of types of modes (each opening / closing execution mode corresponding to 16R jackpot result A to 16R jackpot result C).
In the special game state (open / close execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result A) of the first aspect, the round game (10th round game) of the predetermined round becomes the first round game, and the first aspect is In the special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result B) of the second aspect different, the round game of the predetermined round is configured to be the second round game. The gaming machine described in E3.

According to the above configuration, even if the round game is the same predetermined round, whether it is the first round game or the second round game differs depending on the type of special game state, and the round that should aim at the second area ( Timing) is diversified. That is, since the round to aim at the second region is not uniquely determined from the viewpoint of the player, it is possible to enhance the fun of aiming at the first region and the second region while predicting the round.

Feature E5. Variable ball entry means (variable winning device) that can switch between the first state in which the game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and the second state in which the game ball cannot enter or is more difficult to enter than the first state. 32) and
A switching control means (a function of executing a large winning opening opening / closing process by the main control device 81) that executes switching control for changing the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state and then changing to the second state. ,
With
The special game state has a configuration in which a round game in which the switching control is executed at least once can be executed a plurality of times, and a predetermined condition (a game ball continues to win a V prize) during the execution of the round game. When the detection area of the sensor 807 is passed), the next round game is executed, while when the predetermined condition is not satisfied during the execution of the round game, the next round game is executed. It is configured not to be
The predetermined condition is satisfied when the game ball passes through the first region.
The gaming machine according to any one of features E2 to E4, wherein the predetermined privilege is that the next round game is executed.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to realize a game aiming at a transition to an advantageous situation (one that is more advantageous than the continuation of the round) with the risk that the next round game is not performed and the special game state ends. , It becomes possible to preferably excite the game in the special game state.

Feature E6. Variable ball entry means (variable winning device) that can switch between the first state in which the game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and the second state in which the game ball cannot enter or is more difficult to enter than the first state. 32)
In the special gaming state, the variable ball-entry means is configured to change from the second state to the first state, and then to perform switching control to change to the second state.
The first region and the second region are provided in the variable ball entry means.
Features E2 to feature E2 to feature that both the game ball launched by the first launch operation and the game ball launched by the second launch operation are configured to be able to enter the variable ball entry means. The gaming machine described in any of E5.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to select whether to pass the game ball through the first region or the game ball through the second region while inserting the game ball into the variable ball entry means. That is, when selecting any region and passing the game ball, it is possible to preferably suppress the loss of the original game in the special game state, such as a decrease in the ball entry rate to the variable ball entry means. Therefore, it is possible to suitably balance the game of aiming at any of these areas and the game of inserting the game ball into the variable ball entry means, and it is a suitable configuration for enlivening the game in the special game state. can do.

Feature E7. A transition determination means (a function of executing a hit / fail determination by the main control device 81) that executes a predetermined transition determination based on a predetermined determination trigger, and
When the result of the predetermined transition determination is a predetermined transition correspondence result, the gaming state transition means (mainly) for shifting the gaming state to a special gaming state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. (A function to execute the game state transition process by the control device 81) and
When a predetermined specific condition (the game ball passes through the detection area of the high probability V winning sensor 803) is satisfied, it is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state after the end of the special game state. Therefore, the second transition means (the main control device 81 executes the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode) that can shift to a specific gaming state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode) different from the special gaming state. Function)
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E6, wherein the specific condition is satisfied when the gaming ball passes through the second region in the first gaming situation.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to realize a game in which only the player who has the courage to aim at the second area can acquire the transition to the specific game state, and whether or not the player himself takes the risk. It becomes possible to preferably excite the games that can be selected. In addition, when this feature is applied to the above feature E5, it is possible to realize a game aiming at the transition to the specific game state with the risk that the next round game is not performed and the special game state ends. It is possible to appropriately excite the game in the special game state. "

Feature E8. In the first means, when the game ball passes through the second region in the first game situation, the predetermined privilege and another privilege different from the predetermined privilege (transition to the high probability mode) are obtained. Features E1 to E7, which are provided with means (third passage portion 806) that are more advantageous to the player than when the predetermined privilege is given. The gaming machine described in any of.

According to the above configuration, when the game ball passes through the second region in the first game situation, both a predetermined privilege and another privilege can be obtained. Therefore, it is possible to select whether or not to aim for further addition after the acquisition of the predetermined privilege is guaranteed, instead of the alternative selection of the predetermined privilege or the other privilege. As a result, it is possible to improve the attractiveness of passing the game ball through the second region, and it is possible to preferably enhance the game in which the player selects whether to pass the game ball through the first region or the second region. become.

Feature E9. A specific area (detection area of the high-accuracy V winning sensor 803) provided on the downstream side of the second area, and
A game ball provided between the second region and the specific region and passing through the second region can be distributed to the specific region side and a side different from the specific region side (emission sensor 805 side). Sorting means (shutter 808) and
In the case of the first game situation, the sorting means is set to the first mode (high sorting mode) in which the game ball passing through the second region can be sorted or easily sorted to the specific region side. 2 In the case of a game situation, the distribution means cannot distribute the game ball that has passed through the second region to the specific region side, or it is difficult to distribute the game ball to the specific region side as compared with the first aspect. (Low distribution mode), distribution control means (function to execute V distribution processing by the main control device 81), and
With
The game according to any one of features E1 to E7, characterized in that when the game ball passes through the specific area, it is configured to be more advantageous to the player than when the predetermined privilege is given. Machine.

In the above configuration, the passage of the game ball through the second region does not immediately determine whether the internal processing is advantageous or disadvantageous, but a specific region is provided downstream of the second region. At the same time, a distribution means is provided between the second region and the specific region, and whether the game ball that has passed through the second region passes through the specific region or not is more advantageous or disadvantageous depending on the movement of the game ball. Minutes are done. As a result, it is possible to enhance the original attractiveness of the game machine, which is to enjoy watching the behavior of the game ball, and it is possible to make the configuration suitable for realizing the configuration of any of the features E1 to E7.

Feature E10. The second specific area as the specific area and
A first specific area (detection area of the continuous V winning sensor 807) through which the game ball that has passed through the first area can pass is provided.
When the game ball passes through the first specific area, the predetermined privilege is given.
The gaming machine according to feature E9, which comprises a derivation means (third passage portion 806) for leading out a game ball that has passed through the second specific region to the first specific region or an upstream side thereof.

According to the above configuration, the game ball that has passed through the second specific area can also pass through the first specific area. As a result, when the game ball is passed through the second area in the first game situation, a predetermined privilege is also given, and it is possible to improve the attractiveness of passing the game ball through the second area.

Feature E11. A first guide means (inner passage portion 404) capable of guiding the game ball launched by the first launch operation to the first region, and
A second guide means (outer passage portion 403) capable of guiding the game ball launched by the second launch operation to the second region, and
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E10, characterized in that

According to the above configuration, since the launched game ball can be stably guided to each area, the game ball can be passed through the second area at the timing aimed by the player, and the above features E1 to E10 can be used. It can be a practically preferable embodiment in realizing any of the configurations.

Feature E12. In the first means, when the game ball passes through the first area in the first game situation, the first privilege as the predetermined privilege is given, and the game ball is in the second area in the first game situation. When passing through, the second privilege (transition to the high probability mode), which is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege, is given.
In the second means, when the game ball passes through the first region in the second game situation, the first privilege is given, and when the game ball passes through the second region in the second game situation, the first privilege is given. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E11, characterized in that neither the first privilege nor the second privilege is granted.

In the above configuration, a first area and a second area are provided so that the player can distinguish between the players. In the first area, the first privilege can be obtained regardless of the game situation, and in the second area, the first privilege can be obtained. , Under the first game situation, the second privilege which is more advantageous than the first privilege can be obtained, but under the second game situation, neither the first privilege nor the second privilege can be obtained. There is. As a result, either let the game ball flow down to the first area and aim for the first privilege, or let the game ball flow down to the second area and take the risk that neither the first privilege nor the second privilege can be obtained. It is possible to realize a game in which the player himself selects whether to aim for the acquisition of benefits.

The invention described in the above features E1 to E12 states that "for example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the gaming ball is paid out based on the entry of the gaming ball into the entry portion provided in the gaming area. Regarding the background technology that "what to do is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-81853)", "Here, there is still room for improvement in increasing the attention to the game in the gaming machine." The invention was made with the problem to be solved.

It should be noted that, for each configuration of the above features E1 to E12, the technical configuration shown by any one of features A1 to A16, features B1 to B17, features C1 to C20, features D1 to D13, and features E1 to E12 is shown. It is possible to apply each idea individually, or it is possible to apply a part or all of each technical idea in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in the other configurations of the feature A group to the feature E group to each configuration of the feature A group to the feature E group described in detail above. However, it is also possible to apply each technical idea in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: An operating means operated by a player, a game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game. A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area and gives a privilege to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

Rotating game machine such as a slot machine: Equipped with a variable display means that displays a variable display of a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the final stop display of the symbol sequence, and the symbol changes start due to the operation of the starting operation means. A special game that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the stopping operation means or the predetermined time elapses, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A game machine that generates a state (bonus game, etc.).

Ball-using belt-type game machine (ball-using rotating body-type game machine): Equipped with a variable display means that displays a variable display of a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the symbol sequence as a final stop, which is caused by the operation of the starting operation means. The game starts with the fluctuation of the symbol, and the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the stopping operation means or after a predetermined time elapses, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A throwing device that generates a special game state (bonus game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player, and further provides a ball tray to perform a throwing process of taking in the game ball from the ball saucer, and paying out the game ball to the ball saucer. A gaming machine including a payout device to be performed, and configured so that the operation of the starting operation means becomes effective when the game ball is thrown by the throwing device.

10 ... Pachinko machine, 32 ... Variable winning device, 60 ... Launch handle, 401 ... Guide passage, 504 ... Right entrance, 505 ... Left entrance, 507 ... V winning sensor, 509 ... Winning sensor, 702 ... Winning sensor, 703 ... Fall winning sensor, 706 ... Shutter, 802 ... Winning sensor, 803 ... High accuracy V winning sensor, 808 ... Shutter, 850 ... Right vertical passage, 851 ... Protruding, 862 ... Second passage, 864 ... Opening , 865 ... Shutter.

Claims (1)

A transition determination means that executes a predetermined transition determination based on a predetermined determination opportunity,
When the result of the predetermined transition determination is a predetermined transition correspondence result, a special game state transition means for shifting the gaming state to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, and
A variable ball entry means that can switch between a first state in which a game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and a second state in which a game ball cannot enter or is more difficult to enter than the first state.
A switching control means for executing switching control for changing the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state and then changing to the second state.
With
The special gaming state is configured to be able to execute a round game in which the switching control is executed at least once a plurality of times.
When a specific number of game balls enter the variable ball entry means during the execution of the round game, the round game end means for ending the round game being executed is provided.
In the aspect of the special gaming state, a first round game in which the specific number is the first number and a second round game in which the specific number is a second number different from the first number are set to 1. A gaming machine characterized in that the aspect included in the special gaming state is included.

Images